+ All Categories

WPS

Date post: 03-Dec-2015
Category:
Upload: 0260480981
View: 5 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
Description:
WPS x
Popular Tags:
468
Title page Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System | Release BCR 4 User Guide for Small Cells 9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Issue 3 | March 2014 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Use pursuant to applicable agreements Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Transcript

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 9952

Wireless Provisioning System | Release BCR 4

User Guide for Small Cells

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA

Issue 3 | March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2014 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside

Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.

Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Contents

About this document

Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Reason for reissue ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

New in this release .................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

Prerequisites .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxvixxvi

How this document is organized ........................................................................................................................................ xxvixxvi

Conventions used ................................................................................................................................................................... xxviixxvii

Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxviiixxviii

Document support ................................................................................................................................................................. xxviiixxviii

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxixxxix

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

1 Safety Information

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-21-2

2 General principles

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

Introduction to WPS

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-32-3

About WPS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-42-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

iii

Licenses

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-52-5

License requirements ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-62-6

Software architecture description

Software architecture overview ........................................................................................................................................... 2-72-7

Kernel package ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-102-10

Plug-ins package ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-142-14

WPS functions

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-162-16

WPS GUI main window ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-172-17

Workspace ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-192-19

Dynamic behavior .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-232-23

Instance browsers ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-242-24

Generic instantiation ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-252-25

Object editor ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-262-26

Tabular editor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-282-28

Comparison ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-292-29

Open and save a workspace ................................................................................................................................................ 2-302-30

Workorders ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-312-31

Templates ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-332-33

Checks ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-372-37

Audit ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-392-39

Datasets ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-412-41

Navigators ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-422-42

WPS external interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-432-43

Multiuser collaboration ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-452-45

WPS data sharing ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-472-47

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor .................................................................................................................................. 2-562-56

WPS case-insensitive import interface ........................................................................................................................... 2-572-57

File browser .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-582-58

Parameter search ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-592-59

3 Graphical User Interface

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

WPS main window

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33-3

WPS main window ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

Menu bar

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-93-9

File ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-103-10

Edit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-133-13

Go to ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-143-14

Workorders ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-153-15

Templates ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

Datasets ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-293-29

Checks ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-303-30

Audits .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-353-35

Sharing ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-383-38

Help ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-413-41

Tool bar

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-443-44

Toolbar contents ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-453-45

Instance browser

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-473-47

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

v

Network tab .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-483-48

Workorders tab ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-503-50

Templates tab ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-553-55

Datasets tab ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-583-58

Checks tab ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-603-60

Audit tab .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-623-62

Object editor: Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-643-64

Object editor: Edition ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-683-68

Workorder Panel ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-763-76

Template panel ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-833-83

Dataset conversion panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-863-86

Checks panel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-883-88

Audit panel ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-943-94

Import and export wizard

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1033-103

Exporting key masks .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1043-104

Export of snapshots ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1103-110

Exporting template masks ................................................................................................................................................. 3-1173-117

Exporting templates ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-1203-120

Export of workorders .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1243-124

Importing key masks .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1293-129

Importing reference workorders ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1333-133

Import of snapshots ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1363-136

Importing template masks ................................................................................................................................................. 3-1473-147

Importing templates ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-1493-149

Importing workorders ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1533-153

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Report window and progress bar

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1583-158

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1603-160

Help

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1673-167

4 General WPS operating procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Workspace management

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-54-5

Creating a new workspace ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-64-6

Opening a workspace .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-74-7

Saving a workspace .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-84-8

Configuring WPS settings for network operations ....................................................................................................... 4-94-9

Importing network snapshots ............................................................................................................................................. 4-114-11

Importing tabular from Excel file ..................................................................................................................................... 4-204-20

Creating a sub-network ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-214-21

Setting a sub-network as active ......................................................................................................................................... 4-224-22

Renaming a sub-network ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

Removing a sub-network ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-244-24

Exporting a snapshot ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-254-25

Data sharing management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-324-32

Setting or changing connection parameters .................................................................................................................. 4-334-33

Creating shared workspace ................................................................................................................................................. 4-364-36

Opening shared workspace ................................................................................................................................................. 4-374-37

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

vii

Removing shared workspace .............................................................................................................................................. 4-384-38

Synchronizing workspace ................................................................................................................................................... 4-394-39

Refreshing resource synchronization status .................................................................................................................. 4-404-40

Publishing resource ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-414-41

Retrieving resource ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-424-42

Removing shared resource .................................................................................................................................................. 4-434-43

Making a local copy .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-444-44

Delivering workorder for activation ................................................................................................................................ 4-454-45

Templates management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-464-46

Setting the default source .................................................................................................................................................... 4-474-47

Importing templates ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-484-48

Creating a template ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-504-50

Creating template from a network/dataset object ....................................................................................................... 4-514-51

Adding a child to a template instance ............................................................................................................................. 4-524-52

Removing a template instance ........................................................................................................................................... 4-534-53

Duplicating a template .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-544-54

Migrating a template ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-554-55

Distilling a template .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-564-56

Comparing templates ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-574-57

Updating template .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-584-58

Setting template as default .................................................................................................................................................. 4-594-59

Unsetting a template as default ......................................................................................................................................... 4-604-60

Renaming a template ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-614-61

Deleting a template ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-624-62

Exporting templates ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-634-63

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

External interfaces

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-644-64

Importing a configuration file ............................................................................................................................................ 4-654-65

Exporting a configuration file ............................................................................................................................................ 4-674-67

Exporting table ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-694-69

Workorder management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-704-70

Importing workorders ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-714-71

Importing reference workorders ....................................................................................................................................... 4-724-72

Creating a workorder ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-754-75

Modifying a workorder ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-764-76

Merging workorders .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-784-78

Finalizing workorders ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-794-79

Exporting a single workorder ............................................................................................................................................. 4-814-81

Exporting multiple workorders ......................................................................................................................................... 4-824-82

Managing reference workorders ...................................................................................................................................... 4-844-84

Deleting a workorder ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-884-88

Datasets management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-894-89

Creating a new dataset from MOIs .................................................................................................................................. 4-904-90

Creating a new dataset from a current one .................................................................................................................... 4-914-91

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information ............................................................................................ 4-924-92

Adding MOIs from the network tree ............................................................................................................................... 4-944-94

Adding MOI(s) by conversion ........................................................................................................................................... 4-954-95

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset ................................................................................................ 4-964-96

Removing MOIs from a Dataset ....................................................................................................................................... 4-974-97

Exporting a dataset ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-984-98

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

ix

Deleting a Dataset .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-994-99

Checks management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1004-100

Creating a check profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1014-101

Updating a check profile ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1024-102

Copying a check profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1034-103

Copying check profiles between WPS applications ................................................................................................ 4-1044-104

Running checks on MOIs ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1054-105

Running checks on dataset objects ................................................................................................................................ 4-1064-106

Re-running a check session .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1074-107

Running checks on several object instances .............................................................................................................. 4-1084-108

Deleting a check session ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1094-109

Audit management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1104-110

Creating an audit profile .................................................................................................................................................... 4-1114-111

Updating an audit profile ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1124-112

Duplicating an audit profile .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1134-113

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications ................................................................................ 4-1144-114

Auditing network objects .................................................................................................................................................. 4-1154-115

Auditing dataset objects ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1164-116

Re-running an audit session ............................................................................................................................................. 4-1174-117

Deleting an audit session ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1184-118

Exporting key masks ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-1194-119

Importing key masks .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1254-125

Network objects (network MOI) management

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1294-129

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Creating a network object ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1304-130

Duplicating a network object ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1314-131

Modifying a network object ............................................................................................................................................. 4-1324-132

Modifying a network object based on a template .................................................................................................... 4-1334-133

Comparing a network object with a template ............................................................................................................ 4-1344-134

Comparing two object instances ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1354-135

Comparing attributes for an object ................................................................................................................................ 4-1364-136

Exporting a network object .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1374-137

Deleting a network object ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1384-138

Change attribute value

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1394-139

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab .................................................................................................. 4-1404-140

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab ................................................................................................. 4-1414-141

Changing attribute value using a template .................................................................................................................. 4-1424-142

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class ....................................................... 4-1434-143

Help on Object Types

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1444-144

Browsing a Network Object ............................................................................................................................................. 4-1454-145

Searching for an Object ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1464-146

5 Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

BSRProfile Migration

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-35-3

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release ................................................................................................................................ 5-45-4

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release ................................................................................................................................ 5-65-6

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xi

Configuring FGW with WPS

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-75-7

WPS support of ATCA based FGW ................................................................................................................................... 5-85-8

Configuring FGW data in WPS ........................................................................................................................................ 5-105-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS ................................................................................................................................... 5-115-11

Configuring IPC with WPS

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-125-12

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC ............................................................................................................................ 5-135-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS ...................................................................................................................................... 5-195-19

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS ..................................................................................................................... 5-215-21

Copying configuration data from another IPC ............................................................................................................ 5-245-24

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-285-28

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network .............................................................................. 5-295-29

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region) ................................................................................................. 5-315-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group ................................................................................................. 5-325-32

Reparenting Small Cells

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-335-33

Reparenting a Small Cell ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-345-34

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk ....................................................................................................................................... 5-375-37

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-405-40

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW ........................................................................................................................ 5-415-41

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC ........................................................................................................................... 5-435-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell ............................................................................................................. 5-455-45

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

6 Terminology

Glossary of terms ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Index

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xiii

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

List of tables

2-1 Contents of the Log table .................................................................................................................................... 2-502-50

2-2 Resource synchronization status ........................................................................................................................ 2-512-51

2-3 Synchronization operations ................................................................................................................................. 2-532-53

2-4 Search buttons .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-592-59

3-1 Edit menu commands ............................................................................................................................................ 3-133-13

3-2 Go to menu commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-143-14

3-3 Datasets menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-293-29

3-4 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-453-45

3-5 Check session panel contents .............................................................................................................................. 3-913-91

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xv

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

List of figures

2-1 High level architecture description ..................................................................................................................... 2-82-8

2-2 WPS software packages .......................................................................................................................................... 2-92-9

2-3 WPS main window ................................................................................................................................................. 2-172-17

2-4 Transition between base state and current state ........................................................................................... 2-202-20

2-5 Network state recomputation .............................................................................................................................. 2-222-22

2-6 Instance browser : tabs .......................................................................................................................................... 2-242-24

2-7 Multiuser collaboration ......................................................................................................................................... 2-462-46

2-8 WPS data sharing principle ................................................................................................................................. 2-482-48

2-9 Synchronized workspace ...................................................................................................................................... 2-502-50

2-10 Desynchronized workspace ................................................................................................................................. 2-502-50

2-11 Log table ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-512-51

2-12 Data sharing integration with WMS ................................................................................................................. 2-542-54

2-13 Search interface ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-592-59

2-14 Search option ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-602-60

2-15 Search suggestion mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 2-602-60

3-1 WPS main window ................................................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

3-2 WPS for Access Network title bar ....................................................................................................................... 3-53-5

3-3 Workspace name ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-53-5

3-4 Instance browser ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-63-6

3-5 Dynamic behavior on MO selection ................................................................................................................... 3-83-8

3-6 Change settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-123-12

3-7 Repository menu options ...................................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

3-8 Set current source .................................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xvii

3-9 Template from network tree ................................................................................................................................ 3-203-20

3-10 Template from templates tree ............................................................................................................................. 3-203-20

3-11 Propagate template ................................................................................................................................................. 3-223-22

3-12 Compare with template ......................................................................................................................................... 3-233-23

3-13 Set template as default ........................................................................................................................................... 3-243-24

3-14 Export template ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-253-25

3-15 Migrate template ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-263-26

3-16 Migrate template result ......................................................................................................................................... 3-273-27

3-17 Distill template ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-283-28

3-18 Distill template result ............................................................................................................................................. 3-283-28

3-19 Checks panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-313-31

3-20 Check profile ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-333-33

3-21 Audit panel ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-363-36

3-22 Connect to a live server ........................................................................................................................................ 3-393-39

3-23 Licenses: WPS for Small Cells .......................................................................................................................... 3-413-41

3-24 Help: WPS for Small Cells .................................................................................................................................. 3-423-42

3-25 About ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-433-43

3-26 WPS main Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................. 3-453-45

3-27 Network tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-483-48

3-28 Workorders tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-503-50

3-29 Workorders - set current ....................................................................................................................................... 3-513-51

3-30 Workorders - inhibit changes .............................................................................................................................. 3-523-52

3-31 Workorders - merge ................................................................................................................................................ 3-533-53

3-32 Workorders - merge dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 3-543-54

3-33 Workorders - merge result .................................................................................................................................... 3-543-54

3-34 Templates tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-563-56

3-35 Datasets tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-583-58

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

3-36 Checks tab .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-603-60

3-37 Audit tab ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-623-62

3-38 Object editor: Overview panel ........................................................................................................................... 3-643-64

3-39 Operations .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-643-64

3-40 Navigation .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-653-65

3-41 Children ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-663-66

3-42 Change history ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-673-67

3-43 Object editor: Edition panel ................................................................................................................................ 3-683-68

3-44 Object creation ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-693-69

3-45 Object attributes: by instance .............................................................................................................................. 3-693-69

3-46 Multi-value modification from tabular editor ............................................................................................... 3-703-70

3-47 Sort mechanism on column header ................................................................................................................... 3-713-71

3-48 Object attributes: by type ..................................................................................................................................... 3-723-72

3-49 Attribute details ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-743-74

3-50 Attribute description .............................................................................................................................................. 3-753-75

3-51 Attribute input panel data types ......................................................................................................................... 3-753-75

3-52 Workorder panel ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-763-76

3-53 Workorder description panel ............................................................................................................................... 3-773-77

3-54 Workorder editor panel ......................................................................................................................................... 3-783-78

3-55 Network change tree .............................................................................................................................................. 3-793-79

3-56 Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder ..................................................................................................... 3-793-79

3-57 Unsynchronized workspace ................................................................................................................................. 3-813-81

3-58 Template information panel ................................................................................................................................. 3-833-83

3-59 Template edition panel .......................................................................................................................................... 3-843-84

3-60 Attribute value change .......................................................................................................................................... 3-853-85

3-61 Dataset conversion panel ...................................................................................................................................... 3-863-86

3-62 Check profile panel ................................................................................................................................................ 3-883-88

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xix

3-63 Check session panel ............................................................................................................................................... 3-903-90

3-64 Audit profile panel .................................................................................................................................................. 3-943-94

3-65 Contextual menu from audit profile panel ..................................................................................................... 3-953-95

3-66 Audit session panel ................................................................................................................................................. 3-963-96

3-67 Audit session identification ................................................................................................................................. 3-973-97

3-68 Report tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-983-98

3-69 Audited types tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-993-99

3-70 Audit key mask panel ............................................................................................................................................ 3-993-99

3-71 Template mask panel ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1013-101

3-72 Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel .............................................................................. 3-1023-102

3-73 Import and export wizard: export key masks ............................................................................................. 3-1053-105

3-74 Export key masks (local file system) ............................................................................................................ 3-1063-106

3-75 Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1073-107

3-76 Export key masks : Start .................................................................................................................................... 3-1083-108

3-77 Export key masks: Completed ......................................................................................................................... 3-1093-109

3-78 Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot ............................................................................................... 3-1113-111

3-79 Export snapshot (local file system) ................................................................................................................ 3-1123-112

3-80 Edit Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1133-113

3-81 Select Filter ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1143-114

3-82 Export snapshot: Start ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1153-115

3-83 Export snapshot: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-1163-116

3-84 Export template masks (local file system) ................................................................................................... 3-1183-118

3-85 Select source for export ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1213-121

3-86 Export templates (local file system) .............................................................................................................. 3-1223-122

3-87 Export template: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-1233-123

3-88 Import and Export Wizard: export workorder ............................................................................................ 3-1253-125

3-89 Export workorders (local file system) ........................................................................................................... 3-1263-126

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

3-90 Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1263-126

3-91 Export workorder: Start ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1273-127

3-92 Export workorder: Completed ......................................................................................................................... 3-1283-128

3-93 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks ............................................................................................ 3-1303-130

3-94 Import key masks: (Local file system) ......................................................................................................... 3-1313-131

3-95 Import reference workorder - Specify folder name .................................................................................. 3-1343-134

3-96 Reference Workorder ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1353-135

3-97 Import and export wizard: import snapshot ................................................................................................ 3-1373-137

3-98 Source ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1373-137

3-99 Import snapshot: mode selection .................................................................................................................... 3-1383-138

3-100 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system) .................................................................................... 3-1393-139

3-101 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository) .......................................................................... 3-1403-140

3-102 Select a CM XML snapshot .............................................................................................................................. 3-1413-141

3-103 Import snapshot (snapshot selected) .............................................................................................................. 3-1423-142

3-104 Select subset of objects to import ................................................................................................................... 3-1433-143

3-105 Top-Level objects analysis ................................................................................................................................ 3-1443-144

3-106 Import snapshot: Start ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1453-145

3-107 Import snapshot: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-1463-146

3-108 Import template masks: Completed ............................................................................................................... 3-1483-148

3-109 Import templates: file selection ....................................................................................................................... 3-1503-150

3-110 Template file analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1513-151

3-111 Import template: Completed ............................................................................................................................. 3-1523-152

3-112 Import workorders (Local file system) ......................................................................................................... 3-1543-154

3-113 Import workorders (Live server repository) ............................................................................................... 3-1553-155

3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection ...................................................................................................... 3-1573-157

3-115 Report window example .................................................................................................................................... 3-1583-158

3-116 Progress bar example .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1593-159

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xxi

3-117 Filtering on cell ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1613-161

3-118 Filter on cell value example .............................................................................................................................. 3-1623-162

3-119 Example HTML output ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1643-164

3-120 Filtering from header column ........................................................................................................................... 3-1643-164

3-121 Contextual menu on combo box ..................................................................................................................... 3-1663-166

3-122 Floating help window .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1683-168

3-123 Help toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-1683-168

3-124 Help home page ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1693-169

3-125 Help find panel ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1703-170

3-126 Search help .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1713-171

3-127 Model for BCR help ............................................................................................................................................ 3-1723-172

3-128 Help screen for an object ................................................................................................................................... 3-1733-173

4-1 Import snapshot: mode selection ....................................................................................................................... 4-124-12

4-2 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system) ...................................................................................... 4-134-13

4-3 Import snapshot: define repository ................................................................................................................... 4-144-14

4-4 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository) ............................................................................. 4-154-15

4-5 Select objects to import ......................................................................................................................................... 4-164-16

4-6 Select a subset of top-level objects ................................................................................................................... 4-174-17

4-7 Select a specific subset of top-level objects .................................................................................................. 4-184-18

4-8 Import snapshot: completed ................................................................................................................................ 4-194-19

4-9 Export snapshot (local file system) .................................................................................................................. 4-264-26

4-10 Export snapshot: Edit filter .................................................................................................................................. 4-274-27

4-11 Select a subset of top-level objects ................................................................................................................... 4-284-28

4-12 Select a specific subset of top-level objects .................................................................................................. 4-294-29

4-13 Select a parameterized filter ................................................................................................................................ 4-304-30

4-14 Export snapshot: Completed ............................................................................................................................... 4-314-31

4-15 WPS settings window ............................................................................................................................................ 4-344-34

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

4-16 Import reference workorder ................................................................................................................................ 4-724-72

4-17 Reference Workorder ............................................................................................................................................ 4-744-74

4-18 Import and export wizard: export key masks ............................................................................................. 4-1204-120

4-19 Export key masks (local file system) ............................................................................................................ 4-1214-121

4-20 Select a file .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-1224-122

4-21 Export key masks : Start .................................................................................................................................... 4-1234-123

4-22 Export key masks: Completed ......................................................................................................................... 4-1244-124

4-23 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks ............................................................................................ 4-1264-126

4-24 Import key masks: (Local file system) ......................................................................................................... 4-1274-127

5-1 Import FGW configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-75-7

5-2 ATCA based FGW MOIs ........................................................................................................................................ 5-95-9

5-3 Compare data of two IPC objects ...................................................................................................................... 5-255-25

5-4 Small Cell reparenting ........................................................................................................................................... 5-355-35

5-5 Bulk reparenting ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-385-38

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xxiii

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This document provides information on how to configure small cells networks using 9952

wireless provisioning system (WPS).

The Alcatel-Lucent WPS is optional in the Small Cell Management System (SCMS)

product suite.

Reason for reissue

The reissue reasons are:

Issue number Issue date Reason for reissue

3 March 2014 Standard issue

2 September 2013 Standard issue

1 March 2013 Standard issue

New in this release

New features:

• 118683, Enhanced Geographical Algorithm, see “Reparenting Small Cells” (p. 5-33).

• 126798, Release BCR 4.0 Security Enhancement, see “Reparenting a Small Cell”

(p. 5-34).

• 164324, 9952 WPS support of Small Cell. The entire document is updated to reflect

the new kernel information.

Other changes:

• Added a note to address the CR # 01194711 in “BSRProfile Migration”

(p. 5-3) section.

• Updated document references through out the document.

• Updates to WPS licensing information. For more information, see “Licenses” (p. 2-5).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xxv

• Updates to Graphical User Interface options. For more information, see Chapter 3,

“Graphical User Interface”.

• Updates to general WPS operating procedures. For more information, see Chapter 4,

“General WPS operating procedures”.

Intended audience

The intended audience of this document is the configuration management personnel.

Supported systems

This document applies to Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell Solution BCR4 system release.

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at

points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to

follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

Prerequisites

A good knowledge of UTRAN configuration principles.

Readers should be familiar with the following documents:

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System Small Cells - User Guide,

9YZ-05614-0623-TCZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System Small Cells - Parameters Reference

Guide. This document is divided into four parts:

• Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - BSR Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0600-

RKZZA

• Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - BSG Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0601-

RKZZA

• Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - IPC Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0602-

RKZZA

• Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell - OAM Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-05614-0603-

RKZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System - Installation and Administration

Guide, 9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA

How this document is organized

No specific recommendation applies regarding the way readers should read this

document.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Conventions used

Vocabulary conventions

The following terms are modified to align with the corporate re-branding:

Old naming convention New naming convention

Femto Management System (FMS)

Femto Management Solution (FMS)

Small Cell Management System (SCMS)

Femto Small Cell

BSR Femto Small Cell

BSR Cluster Small Cell Cluster

Wireless Management System for Femto

(WMS for Femto)

Wireless Management System Small Cells (WMS

Small Cells)

Wireless Provisioning System for Femto

(WPS for Femto)

Wireless Provisioning System (WPS)

Typographical conventions

The following typographical conventions are used in this document:

Appearance Description

italicized text • File and directory names

• Emphasized information

graphical user interface text Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface or in

a hardware label

variable A value that the user supplies

key name The name of a key on the keyboard

command-syntax Command names that the user types

input text Text that the user types or selects as input to a system

output text Text that a system displays or prints

IP reference, reference number Related document that is referenced in the document

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xxvii

Related information

Refer to this document At this location For more information on

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless

Provisioning System -

Installation and

Administration Guide,

9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA

http://support.alcatel-

lucent.com

WPS installation and

configuration procedures.

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless

Management System Small

Cells - Introduction,

9YZ-05614-0609-ACZZA

http://support.alcatel-

lucent.com

SCMS documentation collection.

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless

Management System Small

Cells - User Guide,

9YZ-05614-0623-TCZZA

http://support.alcatel-

lucent.com

WMS features, GUI functions,

and menu commands.

Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell -

Feature Activation

Procedures,

9YZ-05614-0014-PGZZA

http://support.alcatel-

lucent.com

Feature activation procedures for

the Small Cell network.

Document support

For support in using this or any other Alcatel-Lucent document, contact Alcatel-Lucent at

the following telephone numbers. These numbers apply for document support only. Please

see the section “Technical support” for details about product hardware, software, and

technical support.

When using this type of

phone

From within the United

States, dial

From outside the United

States, dial

Cellular or VoIP 1-888-582-3688 +1-630-224-2485

Landline – phones lacking the

plus (+) character

1-888-582-3688 origination country exit

code-1-630-224-2485

(replace the plus sign with

your country's exit code)

See a listing of exit codes.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the

Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact

information.

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online

Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-

lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline

([email protected]).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

xxix

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

1 1Safety Information

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on the structure of safety statements which may arise

in the course of your work.

Contents

Structure of safety statements 1-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

1-1

Structure of safety statements

Overview

This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.

General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)

2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or

injury

5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)

SAMPLEB C D

E F

G

H

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injurydue to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transportand position this equipment. [ABC123]

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

Safety Information Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

Safety Information Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

1-3

Safety Information Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

2 2General principles

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the general principles of the WPS.

Contents

Introduction to WPS 2-3

About WPS 2-4

Licenses 2-5

License requirements 2-6

Software architecture description 2-7

Software architecture overview 2-7

Kernel package 2-10

Plug-ins package 2-14

WPS functions 2-16

WPS GUI main window 2-17

Workspace 2-19

Dynamic behavior 2-23

Instance browsers 2-24

Generic instantiation 2-25

Object editor 2-26

Tabular editor 2-28

Comparison 2-29

Open and save a workspace 2-30

Workorders 2-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-1

Templates 2-33

Checks 2-37

Audit 2-39

Datasets 2-41

Navigators 2-42

WPS external interfaces 2-43

Multiuser collaboration 2-45

WPS data sharing 2-47

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor 2-56

WPS case-insensitive import interface 2-57

File browser 2-58

Parameter search 2-59

General principles Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Introduction to WPS

Overview

Purpose

This section introduces the WPS.

Contents

About WPS 2-4

General principles

Introduction to WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-3

About WPS

Overview

WPS is a high-performance kernel, which provides support to design and configure

Alcatel-Lucent networks, based on specific networks recommendations. WPS offers a

centralized view, and configuration of all Network Elements (NE) and related parameters.

WPS kernel-based applications can be used for configuration at every stage of network

management:

• Data engineering of a new network

• Data engineering for network expansion, densification

• Data engineering for network optimization

• Data engineering for upgrade provisioning

WPS manages configuration data coming from various sources. The source file format

used in WPS is CM XML.

WPS operations support very large networks. A single instance of WPS supports multiple

WMS main servers within a Regional Operational Center (ROC).

General principles

Introduction to WPS

About WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Licenses

Overview

Purpose

This section provides an overview of licenses.

Contents

License requirements 2-6

General principles

Licenses

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-5

License requirements

Installation scenarios

The following installation scenarios are applicable to the current version of the :

• Installation on a PC client

• Installation in a multi-user environment (such as Citrix Systems, Inc. Citrix® servers).

A license file is required to use the application.

A demo license file is provided with the software for each installation scenario. The demo

licenses can be installed on any PC or Citrix server.

Note: The Version 3.0 software installs the plug-ins for all supported technologies

automatically by default. The installed licenses filter what plug-ins are visible in the

GUI.

The demo license supports all technologies (LTE, W-CDMA, and Small Cells). Thus,

when the demo license is installed, the plug-ins for all supported technologies are

visible in the GUI.

The GUI screen images in this document presume that the user only has the licenses

installed. Thus, the user can only see the features and options in the GUI.

In a multi-user environment such as Citrix, a license is required for each server on which

the application must be installed. If the Citrix environment is composed of a farm of

servers, ensure that you have the required set of licenses for installation and use.

For more information on installation and obtaining and importing the license files, see

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System - Installation and Administration

Guide, 9YZ-05608-0001-RJZZA.

General principles

Licenses

License requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

High level software architecture

The WPS architecture is illustrated in the following figure:

General principles

Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-7

The WPS software architecture is based on the following two software packages:

• the “Kernel package” (p. 2-10)

• the “Plug-ins package” (p. 2-14)

Figure 2-1 High level architecture description

General principles

Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 2-2 WPS software packages

General principles

Software architecture description

Software architecture overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-9

Kernel package

Characteristics of the kernel package

The kernel package has the following characteristics:

• Defines a structure for the network configuration data. For more information, see

“Structure of the network configuration data” (p. 2-10).

• Provides an event propagation that allows other services to monitor all changes of the

network configuration data. The workorders are updated based on the event

propagation. For more information, see “Event propagation” (p. 2-11).

• Provides a GUI that is built as a set of independent panels. These panels interact

through event propagation. For more information, see “GUI components” (p. 2-12).

• Provides feature-specific services such as templates and datasets with the same model

or GUI. For more information, see “Feature specific services” (p. 2-13).

Structure of the network configuration data

The WPS uses a generic representation of the network configuration data.

The following types of data structure are available:

• Managed object types

• Managed object instances

Managed object types

The following properties represent each managed object type in WPS:

• Name and identifier of the type, for example, Lp, LogicalProcessor.

• Containment constraints such as the kind of managed objects and how many managed

objects it can contain.

• Description of each attribute with the following information:

– Name

– Description

– A primary key indication for the attribute. A primary key is the object identifier in

the containment tree.

– The data type and constraints of the attribute, for instance, a decimal in the range

[1..16383], or a list of 20-character maximum ASCII strings, or a structure

containing two IP addresses and a decimal.

The WPS can manage several versions of the same object type. These versions are

managed as different and independent object types.

The workspace contains a set of models that belong to a set of versions. A given managed

object type can belong to only one version.

General principles

Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Managed object instances

Based on the object types information, the WPS can create and modify object instances.

These object instances are organized into a containment tree. The following properties

describe each node of the tree:

• The managed object type

• The key value (a unique identifier in the scope of its parent)

• The attribute values

• A list of all the managed object instances contained in the node

The keys and attribute values are expressed in the tool using one of the following data

structures:

• Atomic - Represents an atomic value such as an ASCII String, a decimal.

• List - Represents an ordered or variable-length array of values.

• Struct - Represents an ordered or fixed-length array of named values.

Event propagation

The event propagation allows other services to monitor all changes made to the network

configuration data.

Workorder definition

A workorder defines the transition from an initial configuration to a final configuration

that fulfills an evolution request.

A workorder is a structure composed of the following basic changes:

• Creation of a MOI

• Deletion of a MOI

• Modification of a MOI

The network configuration represented in the WPS is the MO tree. The MO tree in WPS

indicate the result of the execution of these changes on an initial reference network

configuration. The MO tree managed within WPS is thus a final view of the configuration

changes.

Configuration change events

An event propagation mechanism is implemented in the kernel, which ensures that any

modification made on the MO tree generates an event. The events are broadcast to the

potential listeners.

The event propagation mechanism is used in the GUI package. The workorder manager

also considers these events to update the current workorder.

The interfaces used to update the MO tree within the WPS are all based on this

mechanism.

General principles

Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-11

Replaying workorders

The MO tree managed within the WPS is a final view of the network. The MO tree

includes all the modifications represented by the workorders.

If a change must be made in the workorder list, the final view is rebuilt with the

following:

• A reference to the initial configuration snapshot is kept within the kernel. Usually, this

is a reference to a snapshot that can be re-imported into WPS.

• The workorder management service enables execution of workorder on a network

configuration.

To re-evaluate a set of workorders, the WPS runs the following operations:

• Discarding the current network configuration

• Loading the initial snapshot

• Executing the commands of each workorder in the list

GUI components

The GUI is implemented as a set of independent components that interact by referring to

the same network configuration data. These components exchange data on the selection

and modification events.

Modification events

The modification events are generated each time the MO tree is modified. Specific

modification events are also broadcast when data structures such as templates or datasets

are modified. The GUI elements such as panels or menu actions can subscribe to these

notifications.

Current selection

The GUI package also relies on the concept of current selection. The current selection is

handled through the exchange of selection events.

The selection can apply to any of the following objects:

• Workorder

• Template

• Set of managed objects

The selection is exclusive, that is, the selection of an element replaces the previous

selection.

This event-based selection mechanism allows any GUI element to be either a selection

source, a selection listener, or both. For instance, a menu action can select an element. A

menu action can listen to the selection of specific elements to turn itself enabled or

disabled.

General principles

Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Feature specific services

WPS provides feature-specific services with the relevant mechanisms or the templates

and the datasets.

The templates, datasets, and checks are implemented on top of the basic services and

follow the same model and GUI mechanism.

Templates

A template is associated to a Managed Object type. The templates contain a list of default

values for all the type attributes and can be used by the MO instantiation mechanism. This

allows to initialize attribute values for new MOs. The templates can also be used during

the MO lifetime to alter a subset of its attributes.

The template manager maintains the mapping between an object type and all the

associated templates.

Specific modification events are generated in the following cases:

• A template is created.

• A template is deleted.

• A template attribute is modified.

The association between a Managed Object and its original template is not retained within

the tool. In other words, the template assignment feature is not supported in WPS.

Datasets

A dataset is a set of references to managed objects. A dataset manager maintains a list of

all existing datasets.

Specific modification events are generated each time:

• a dataset is created

• a dataset is deleted

• a reference is added to a dataset

• a reference is removed from a dataset

General principles

Software architecture description

Kernel package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-13

Plug-ins package

WPS is a common platform for the development of network technology-specific services.

WPS for UMTS is based on this platform. These services are implemented using the

following types of components, named plug-ins:

• “Checks plug-in” (p. 2-14)

• “Navigators plug-in” (p. 2-14)

• “Operations plug-in” (p. 2-14)

Checks plug-in

A check performs an audit on a given part of a network configuration. A check can also

generate a report which can help to fix configuration problems.

Semantic check interface

A custom-designed check must comply with the CustomCheck interface. As such, it must

indicate the kind of Managed Object on which it applies.

Navigators plug-in

A navigator performs a crossing of the network configuration tree. With this option, you

can find a target managed object that is logically associated to a source managed object.

Navigators are implemented to provide association-like services when the association is

not described in the network configuration model.

Navigator interface

A couple (source/target) of Managed Object types identify the navigators. As such, a

custom-designed navigator must comply to the CustomNavigator interface.

A navigator provides the following information:

• the type of the source MOs

• the type of the target MOs towards which the navigation is applied

Operations plug-in

An operation performs a set of modifications on the network configuration data. The user

can fine-tune the set of parameters.

Operation interface

A typical operation involves the following two components:

• a model part, which is closely related to the network configuration data

• a panel or the GUI part

General principles

Software architecture description

Plug-ins package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

The two parts interact by exchanging a list of parameters. This list contains the parameter

values specified by the user. The typical interaction between an operation and its

associated panel consists of the following phases:

1. Create the list of parameters

The operation is invoked on a given MO. According to the information found on the

MO and its neighborhood, the operation builds a list of parameters. For each

parameter, the following attributes are specified:

• the name

• the type

For instance, an enumeration of the following values: true, false, or unknown.

• the default value

For instance, False. This value is typically computed from the information found

in the MO and represents an abstraction of the current network configuration.

2. Check the list of parameters

When the user changes the parameter values, the operation may check the consistency

of these parameters. Eventually, the inconsistent parameters are tagged as erroneous.

3. Run operation

When the operation has approved the parameter list, the panel can invoke the

execution of the operation. The network configuration is updated during this phase

only.

A standard operation panel is provided with the tool. However, it is possible to implement

a specific panel for a given operation. This may be implemented if specific graphical

representations are needed.

General principles

Software architecture description

Plug-ins package

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-15

WPS functions

Overview

Purpose

Contents

WPS GUI main window 2-17

Workspace 2-19

Dynamic behavior 2-23

Instance browsers 2-24

Generic instantiation 2-25

Object editor 2-26

Tabular editor 2-28

Comparison 2-29

Open and save a workspace 2-30

Workorders 2-31

Templates 2-33

Checks 2-37

Audit 2-39

Datasets 2-41

Navigators 2-42

WPS external interfaces 2-43

Multiuser collaboration 2-45

WPS data sharing 2-47

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor 2-56

WPS case-insensitive import interface 2-57

File browser 2-58

Parameter search 2-59

General principles

WPS functions

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS GUI main window

Overview

When opening a WPS session, the main window appears. The user can launch different

GUI commands and access various WPS functions from this desktop window.

The WPS main window contains the following parts:

• “Menu bar” (p. 3-9)

• “Tool bar” (p. 3-44)

• “Instance browser” (p. 3-47): Workorders, Network, Checks, Templates and Datasets

tabs

• Working area: The WPS working area is composed of the following parts:

– “Object editor: Overview” (p. 3-64)

– “Object editor: Edition” (p. 3-68)

– “Workorder Panel” (p. 3-76)

– “Template panel” (p. 3-83)

– “Dataset conversion panel” (p. 3-86)

Figure 2-3 WPS main window

General principles

WPS functions

WPS GUI main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-17

– “Checks panel” (p. 3-88)

– “Audit panel” (p. 3-94)

For more detailed information about the WPS main window and its components, see

“WPS main window” (p. 3-3).

General principles

WPS functions

WPS GUI main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workspace

Overview

The workspace defines the current planning view. The workspace contains all the data

that can be managed within the application:

• Network MOI

• Template MOI

• Workorders

• Datasets

• Check sessions

• Audit sessions

• Key masks

• Audit profiles

• Template masks

The network objects (displayed from the Network tab) are a part of the workspace.

The workspace consists of:

• An initial network view (initial snapshot)

• Workorders

• Templates

• Datasets

• Check sessions

The main window banner displays the loaded workspace.

WPS allows the user to perform the following operations on a workspace:

• Create a new empty workspace. A new empty workorder is automatically created on

creating the workspace. For more information, see “Creating a new workspace”

(p. 4-6).

• Open a workspace. For more information, see “Opening a workspace” (p. 4-7).

• Save a workspace. For more information, see “Saving a workspace” (p. 4-8).

Network state

The workspace is related to the network states.

The network state refers to the set of network MOIs that can be accessed at a given time

during the provisioning process. The application distinguishes two specific network

states:

• The base state, related to the initial state of the workspace.

• The current state, related to all modifications performed on the base state.

General principles

WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-19

The transition between the base state and the current state is stored in the workspace as

workorders.

The base state can either be empty (contains no MOI) or created from an imported

network snapshot.

Once modified, the base state can no longer be browsed within the application. Only the

current state is made available to the user.

Figure 2-4 Transition between base state and current state

General principles

WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Synchronization

Synchronization deals with the modification of the base state of the workspace. Two cases

of synchronization are taken into account:

• Modification of the base state without change of the current state (synchronization

with priority on current state).

• Modification of the base state without change of the workorders of the current

workspace (synchronization with priority on workorders).

Network state recomputation

The current network state can be recomputed according to structure changes performed

on the current workspace.

These structure changes can be the following:

• Synchronization

• Modification of the workorder sequence related to the workspace

• Deletion of one or several workorders

• Selection of the current workorder

The recomputation is based on the execution on the base network state of all the

workorders defined until the current workorder.

Recomputation calculates the current network state by applying on the base network state

the set of workorders until the current workorder.

General principles

WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-21

Workspace management

For more information, see “Workspace management” (p. 4-5)

Figure 2-5 Network state recomputation

General principles

WPS functions

Workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Dynamic behavior

WPS GUI

The WPS GUI consists of independent components, which interact by referring to the

same network configuration data and by exchanging the selection and modification

events.

Behavior

The commands are enabled based on the type of object selected. The working parts, such

as wizards and operations, are displayed based on the type of MOIs selected. The

information is displayed based on the ongoing modification of the selected MOI.

General principles

WPS functions

Dynamic behavior

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-23

Instance browsers

List of MOIs

WPS provides instance browsers to navigate across the different MOIs.

The MOIs are the following:

• Network managed object

• Workspace

• Workorder

• Check session

• Template

• Dataset

• Audit session

Instance browser tabs

The instance browsers are displayed within several tabs:

• Network tab: displays the entire MOI in a tree.

• Workorders tab: displays the workspace and the workorders.

• Templates tab: displays the defined templates

• Datasets tab: displays the defined datasets

• Checks tab: displays the check profiles and the check sessions.

• Audit tab: displays the audit profiles and the audit sessions.

For the GUI related to the WPS tabs, see: “Instance browser” (p. 3-47)

Figure 2-6 Instance browser : tabs

General principles

WPS functions

Instance browsers

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Generic instantiation

Usage

WPS provides the user with generic instantiation mechanisms. The user can perform the

following tasks:

• Create a child MOI from a selected parent MOI in the network instance browser

• Delete an MOI

• Copy and paste an MOI

General principles

WPS functions

Generic instantiation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-25

Object editor

Overview

The object editor allows the user to view and modify the attributes of each MOI (Network

MOI, template, MOI of a dataset). Edition is provided for basic configuration of all the

different types of managed objects.

The following tree views are available for the MOIs in the instance browser:

• Network tree

• Template tree

• Dataset tree

The instance browser automatically updates the object editor.

From the object editor, the user can perform the following actions:

• View information on a selected parameter

• Sort attributes by MOI, parameter name, or value. Sorting allows modification and

comparison of attribute values.

Global update

The global update enables to modify the parameter values of a set of MOIs. The MOIs

must be of the same type and same version.

The set of MOIs must be selected in an instance browser from any of the following tree

views:

• Network tree

• Template tree

• Dataset tree

The object editor part related to these MOIs is automatically updated.

Object editor GUI

For information on the Object editor GUI, see the following sections:

• “Object editor: Overview” (p. 3-64)

• “Object editor: Edition” (p. 3-68)

Template selection at component creation

When a component is created from the object editor, you can select a template. When

WPS prompts you to select the template, the default template is proposed.

General principles

WPS functions

Object editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Network object management

For the procedures related to the network object management, see “Network objects

(network MOI) management” (p. 4-129).

General principles

WPS functions

Object editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-27

Tabular editor

Function

The WPS tabular display provides a spreadsheet view.

The tabular editor allows the user to consult and modify the attributes of an MOI

(Network MOI or the MOI of a dataset) of the same type (object class).

The tabular editor is displayed on selecting an MOI in the instance browser. All the

instances of the selected type are displayed within the tabular editor.

The tabular editor allows you to perform the following actions:

• Modify the parameter values for a set of MOIs

• View information on a selected parameter

• Highlight differences between default model values or template values and cell values

within the tabular editor

• Use the tabular editor functions

• Delete and create a large number of objects in bulk (with import of tables)

• Filter a table by the cell values. This is achieved from a contextual menu in the header

column or directly from a cell.

• Sort a table by the cell values

• Export the content of a table. The table can be exported as an HTML file.

• Filter a combo box

For more information on Tabular editor GUI, see “Tabular editor capabilities” (p. 3-160).

General principles

WPS functions

Tabular editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Comparison

Purpose

The WPS allows the user to perform the comparison of two MOI subtrees of the same

type defined in the workspace.

The user can run the following comparison operations:

• Compare two MOIs

• Compare an MOI with a template

For more information on how to compare an object with a template, see “Compare

with template...” (p. 3-22) and “Comparing a network object with a template”

(p. 4-134).

• Compare two templates

General principles

WPS functions

Comparison

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-29

Open and save a workspace

Overview

The Open and Save menus allow you to open and save a workspace in the binary format.

The WPS workspaces are saved as <file name>.wps

For more information on managing WPS workspaces, see “File” (p. 3-10).

General principles

WPS functions

Open and save a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workorders

The workorders define the evolution of the initial configuration. The workorders

constitute a sequence of elementary provisioning operations, from a single NE attribute

modification to network-wide bulk configurations.

Multiple workorders can be created to define the configuration operations and several

workorders can be merged to define wide transitions.

The example scenarios for the workorder definition are as follows:

• Creation of objects and MOIs

• Updates to objects and MOIs

• Deletion of MOIs and objects

The workorders are saved as XWO files with the following information:

• workorder name: Indicates the name of the workorder

• originator: Indicates the origin of the workorder

• description: Provides a description of the workorder

• appName: Indicates the system that generated the workorder, for example, WMS or

WPS.

• appRelease: Indicates the application version of the system that generated the

workorder, for example WPS version 2.0

• sessionID: Indicates the host name and IP address of the PC, server, ROC, or the

OAM server that generated the workorder.

• creationDate: Indicates the date of workorder creation.

• The NE or MOI configuration data.

Note: The CM XML file with the XCM extension also contains information on the

snapshot originating system, application name, application release version, creation

date, and name of the snapshot.

The following operations are applicable for the workorders:

• Create a new workorder within a workspace.

• Delete a workorder - Deleting a workorder allows you to return to the previous

network state.

• Import a workorder

• Export a workorder

• Create a workorder based on the reference workorder

• Modify the workorder properties

The Workorders menu bar also allows the following actions:

• Create a new workorder

• Import a workorder

General principles

WPS functions

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-31

• Export a workorder

• Show the current workorder

For more information on the Workorders menu commands, see “Workorders” (p. 3-15).

For information on managing workorders, see “Workorder management” (p. 4-70).

Inhibiting configuration changes

The MOI configuration changes in a workorder can be withheld or inhibited. WPS does

not apply an inhibited change to the network.

For attribute value changes, the inhibition status can be true or false.

For MOI changes, the following states are applicable:

• True - All changes are inhibited

• False - No change inhibited

• Partial - Some attribute changes inhibited

Inhibited changes are not exported in the XML workorder during the export operation.

For more information on the menu commands for inhibition, see “Workorder editor

panel” (p. 3-78).

Cloning workorders

The WPS provides the option to define reference workorders and reuse the reference

workorders with the required modifications. The reference workorders can be exported

with the references files, imported into WPS with the required modifications, and applied

to the Network.

The inputs for the workorder cloning operations are as follows:

• A reference workorder

• A bulk file containing the values of attributes and keys

Note: The workorder cloning feature is available with the WPS_V3_Desktop_

WCDMA_ Advanced license.

General principles

WPS functions

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Templates

Overview

With the template instances feature, the WPS provides the ability to define and use a set

of recommended values during the MOI definition.

The template instances store a set of attributes with values, in a structure aligned with the

Resource Model. Attributes that have values within a template are initialized at object

creation. This initialization uses the model initial value and additional sources such as

operations, CM XML interface, and GUI.

The template carries only the recommended values. Attributes with no value within the

template are assigned default values from the initial value of the Resource model.

The WPS allows you to define a recommended value similar to the model initial value.

General information on the templates

The following topics provide more information on templates:

• “Template identification” (p. 2-34)

• “Template tree” (p. 2-34)

• “Default template” (p. 2-34)

• “Source of template instance and attribute” (p. 2-35)

• “Default template source” (p. 2-35)

• “Implicit templates” (p. 2-35)

• “Template backward compatibility” (p. 2-34)

• “Template distillation mechanism” (p. 2-34)

• “Template migration” (p. 2-33)

• “WPS partial template import and export” (p. 2-33)

Template migration

The WPS template migration allows the user to automatically migrate a template from

release N into release N+1. The customized changes are preserved during migration.

For the GUI related to the template migration, see “Migrate” (p. 3-25) in the Templates

menu.

WPS partial template import and export

The WPS template format evolves. Templates are reduced to values differing from model

default values. Templates therefore focus on explicitly recommended values.

The source field provides information on the origin of each template value.

General principles

WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-33

Template distillation mechanism

WPS provides a distillation mechanism. After the template import, the template values

are compared to the model default values. If the values match, the parameter is removed

from the template. The distillation mechanism restricts the templates to the relevant

parameters.

For the GUI related to the template distillation, see “Distill” (p. 3-27) in the Templates

menu.

Template backward compatibility

WPS supports backward compatibility for templates managed by previous and the current

versions of WPS. The templates can be directly loaded to a later version of WPS if the

release supports the template version.

Template identification

Several template instances can be defined for the same object type or version. Templates

are identified by:

• A name, allocated by the Template originator

• The object type they deal with

• The name of the associated model (name of the model provided with the domain

specific plug-in)

• Version

The name is used to select the Template instances throughout the application. It must

contain indication on its context of use.

Template tree

Templates can define a substructure that maps the network resource model. Such

templates are called template trees.

When creating an object instance from a template tree, the recommended values of the

template are propagated on the root MOI. The template substructure of the children and

the associated recommended values are reproduced on the MOI.

Default template

You can set a template instance as default template for a specific object type and version.

Note: Do not set the template instance, which is used for creating an MOI, as the

default template.

For every object type and version, only one default template instance can be defined.

General principles

WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Source of template instance and attribute

A source is associated to each template instance and to each valued template attribute.

This source indicates the organization that originated the recommended value.

For attributes not valued in the template, the pseudo source Model is used throughout the

GUI.

For recommended values provided by Alcatel-Lucent, the source takes values among

RD_reserved_nt and eng_reserved_nt. The RD_reserved_nt source indicates that the

end-user must not modify the data. Other sources such as customer for the parameters

listed in the to be filled file.

Default template source

The application maintains a default template source. It is used to automatically initialize

the source while creating or updating templates.

Implicit templates

Implicit templates refer to specific template instances used within the application

operations or wizards. The user can value such templates without modifying their

structure. A specific text file that lists all the implicit templates can be found in the

templates delivered with WPS.

The template name of an implicit template is never displayed in a wizard. The user cannot

select it. The wizards use the implicit templates for the creation or the update of an object.

The operations verify the existence of the implicit templates they refer to, as a

pre-condition of their execution. This protects the application from potential deletion of

implicit templates

Actions on templates

The user can execute the following actions on the templates:

• Create new templates from a selected MOI (instance only or instance and sub-tree)

• Modify the existing templates

• Set a template as the default template to be used during Managed Object (MO)

instantiation and datafill

• Set a template as a non-default template

• Propagate a selected set of template parameters to a selected set of MOIs

• Compare a template with a MOI. Comparison allows the user to propagate parameter

values in a second step.

• Compare two templates of the same class. This function is launched from a contextual

menu, on two templates selected in the template tree. It displays the list of differences

in a tabular form.

General principles

WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-35

• Import/export templates in XML format

• Clone a template

• Delete a template

• Distill a template

• Migrate a template

• Set the source of a template

Template GUI

For the Graphical User Interface related to the templates, see “Templates” (p. 3-19)

For the Graphical User Interface related to the import of templates, see “Importing

templates” (p. 3-149).

For the Graphical User Interface related to the export of templates, see “Exporting

templates” (p. 3-120).

Template management

For the procedures related to the templates, see “Templates management” (p. 4-46).

General principles

WPS functions

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Checks

Overview

The WPS includes a set of checks to verify the consistency of the configuration data. The

checks reduce the risk of service impacts resulting from the incorrect configuration data

applied to the network.

WPS provides syntax checks options. These checks ensure that parameter values are

within the accepted range of values. The checks are automatically executed from the

network models and are run during the edition.

For more information on Checks menu commands, see “Checks” (p. 3-30).

For the procedures related to the checks, see “Checks management” (p. 4-100).

For more information about the WPS checks, see WPS Access Checks Description,

UMT/OMC/DD/012066.

Check sessions

The following operations can be performed on a check session:

• Create a check session on a set of MOIs

• Modify a check session

• Delete a check session

• Re-run a check session

• Add erroneous objects to a dataset

• Rename a check session

• Enable or disable auto-corrections on the of the check errors

• Navigate from a selected error on a check session to the MOI instance in the Object

editor panel.

The check sessions are saved in the current workspace.

For more information, see “Checks panel” (p. 3-88).

Check profiles

The WPS allows the user to create check profiles. These profiles can be edited, modified,

deleted, and selected before starting a check session.

At the creation, a check profile contains all the checks available in the system. Some of

checks can be removed from the profile.

General principles

WPS functions

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-37

The check profile offers the following Tabular editor functions:

• Filtering

• Sort

• Export as HTML

For more information about the Tabular editor functions, see “Tabular editor

capabilities” (p. 3-160).

The check profile panel allows you to perform the following operations:

• Enable or disable a check

• Enable or disable all the checks

• Activate or deactivate auto-correction of a check error

• Filter checks based on a cell value

For more information on check profile, see “Check profile panel” (p. 3-88).

Checks specific to WPS

The following checks are specific to WPS:

• Semantic checks

• Checks and rules

Semantic checks

The semantic checks ensure that the configuration settings follow the built-in engineering

rules. These rules apply to the configuration data specific to the NEs and the external

connections between the NEs. The semantic checks can be launched from any MOI.

Checks and rules

The UTRAN-specific checks and rules are available in WPS. The checks and rules are

related to IP and the following UTRAN features:

• IMA

• Drop and Insert

The naming attribute displayed in the network tree can be customized.

General principles

WPS functions

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Audit

Overview

The Audits feature allows you to compare a network with a set of templates and generate

a report on the differences.

The Audit tab provides the following information:

• Audit sessions

• Audit profiles

• Key masks

• Template masks

For more information on the Audits menu commands, see “Audits” (p. 3-35).

Audit profiles

WPS allows creation, edition, and deletion of audit profiles. You can run an audit session

on an existing audit profile.

An audit profile contains all the templates available in the system when created in WPS.

You can select the templates that are relevant for the profile.

The audit profile provides the Tabular editor view with the following functions:

• Filtering

• Sort

• Export as HTML

For more information about the Tabular editor, see “Tabular editor capabilities”

(p. 3-160).

The following operations can be performed on an audit profile:

• Include or exclude a template

• Include or exclude all the templates

• Associate a template mask to a template

• Associate a key mask to a template

• Filter on cell value for a template

For more information on audit profiles, see “Audit profile panel” (p. 3-94).

Audit sessions

With WPS, the following operations are applicable for an audit session:

• Create an audit session on a set of selected MOIs or on the entire network

• Delete an audit session

General principles

WPS functions

Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-39

• Re-run an audit session

• Add the audited objects to a dataset

• Rename an audit session

For more information on audit sessions, see “Audit session panel” (p. 3-96).

Key masks

WPS allows the creation, edition, deletion, import, and export of key masks. The key

mask allows definition of filtering criteria based on the ID of an object, for a given

template.

For more information on audit key masks, see “Key mask panel” (p. 3-99).

Template masks

WPS allows the creation, edition, deletion, import, and export of template masks. During

the creation of a template mask, you can select the relevant object from the model. The

attributes for this object can be specified or set. The values set for the attributes can be

compared in the audit session.

For more information on the template masks, see “Template mask panel” (p. 3-101).

General principles

WPS functions

Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Datasets

Datasets (named Network Element List in the previous edition of the WPS tool) define a

set of instances manipulated by the user.

Actions on the datasets

You can run the following actions on the datasets:

• Create a new dataset from one or several MOIs selected from the network tree

• Append one or several MOIs to an existing dataset

• Remove one or several MOIs from an existing dataset

• Create a dataset from a workorder. Inhibited and referred components are excluded.

• Create a dataset from a selection in the tabular editor

• Delete a dataset

• Convert a dataset into another dataset

• Run checks on a dataset

Supported converting and filtering rules

The list of supported converting and filtering rules is the following:

• Children conversion

• Father conversion

• Link reference conversion

Dataset creation from check session result

The check session result lists the objects on error. A dataset can be generated from this

list.

Dataset GUI

For the Graphical User Interface related to the datasets, see: Datasets menu.

Dataset management

For the procedures related to the datasets, see the chapter “Datasets management”

(p. 4-89).

General principles

WPS functions

Datasets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-41

Navigators

Navigators allow the user to navigate from a selected MOI of the network instance

browser to another logically associated MOI.

The semantic checks, operations, wizards and rules, navigators are business-specific

plug-ins. They are not directly issued from the UTRAN models.

• Femto -> FemtoCluster

• FemtoCluster -> Cluster

• Femto -> profile

• Location Area -> Femto

• Femto -> Location Area

• Femto -> FemtoGroup

• FemtoGroup -> Femto

Navigator enhancement

To facilitate the navigation, a graphical area dedicated to the display of navigators is

added to the Network tree.

See: “Navigation” (p. 3-65) in the Object Editor panel.

General principles

WPS functions

Navigators

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS external interfaces

Overview

WPS offers CM (Configuration Management) XML interface for import and export

operations. These operations can be launched from a dedicated "Import and Export"

wizard.

XML is an auto-descriptive and extensible language. It has been defined to allow better

interoperability between applications.

CM XML interface for import and export operations

WPS offers CM XML import/export operations.

The CM XML import operations are the following:

• Snapshot import:

– Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders

– Merge with planned network

– Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders

– Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot

• Template import

• Workorder import

The CM XML export operations are the following:

• Snapshot export

Reverse XML workorder:

Any XML workorder generated in WPS is exported along with the reverse XML

workorder which contains the exact reverse commands. After a workorder execution

on the OAM server, the execution of the corresponding reverse workorder restores the

initial configuration. Reverse XML workorders constitute a Configuration

Management fallback at the OAM level.

• Template export

• Workorder export

• Dataset export

Subsets of the network or lists of objects defined as datasets in WPS can be exported

in XML snapshot format. They are available to other applications (WPS or others).

This brings flexibility and adds new possibilities in the Configuration Management

process.

Tabular export of import/export reports

Import/export reports can be exported in HTML format (in addition to XML). This allows

the user to retrieve a tabulated report with formatting.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS external interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-43

XML file extensions for WPS

The XML files managed by WPS have the following extensions:

• Snapshot: <file name>.xcm

• Template: <file name>.xtpl

• Workorder: <file name>.xwo

WPS GUI related to the external interfaces

For the WPS Graphical User Interface related to the external interfaces, see: “Import and

export wizard” (p. 3-103)

Procedures related to the external interfaces

For the procedures related to the WPS external interfaces, see the chapter “External

interfaces” (p. 4-64)

General principles

WPS functions

WPS external interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Multiuser collaboration

Overview

The introduction of XML format, workorders, and task-oriented wizards enable multiuser

collaboration.

Several users from different functional teams (RF, transmission) can work on relevant

aspects of the provisioning. The corresponding XML workorder containing individual

updates to the configuration data can be shared in a common workspace repository, to

allow access to multiple users.

Uploading the workorder into another WPS automatically completes the corresponding

instance. The two WPS applications containing the same reference snapshot can also be

stored in the repository.

General principles

WPS functions

Multiuser collaboration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-45

Figure 2-7 Multiuser collaboration

General principles

WPS functions

Multiuser collaboration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS data sharing

Overview

The WPS data sharing allows several users to work simultaneously on the common

configuration data.

The individual updates can be updated locally within WPS or the configuration data

updates can be shared in a common workspace repository that allows access to multiple

users. Several users can collaborate simultaneously on a common project, by using a

common workspace repository.

Figure 2-8, “WPS data sharing principle” (p. 2-48) illustrates the WPS data sharing

principles.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-47

In this environment, several versions of the same data can coexist:

• The shared version managed by the workspace repository

• One or several versions on the local file system

The WPS detects and reports potential conflicts in the data shared by the users.

Figure 2-8 WPS data sharing principle

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

For more information on data sharing GUI commands, see “Sharing” (p. 3-38).

For the procedures related to the data sharing, see “Data sharing management” (p. 4-32).

WPS data sharing concepts

The WPS data sharing uses the following concepts:

• “Resources” (p. 2-49)

• “Workspace repository” (p. 2-49)

• “Synchronization status” (p. 2-49)

Resources

The WPS data sharing model organizes the data in individual units, called resources. The

resources define the minimum granularity for sharing operations.

The WPS supports the following types of resources:

• Workorder

• Initial snapshot

The WPS attaches a version number to each shared resource.

Workspace repository

The workspace repository stores and manages all the data sharing resources.

Within the workspace repository, the resources are arranged in shared workspaces. Each

shared workspace can support a collaborative team, with the following capabilities:

• A shared workspace can be accessed simultaneously by several users.

• Several shared workspaces can be declared in the workspace repository.

A shared workspace differs from a local workspace (published resource), because of the

following reasons:

• A shared workspace supports a subset of the local workspace data (the published

resources).

• For a shared workspace, the internal format is independent of the WPS binary format,

.wps.

Synchronization status

The synchronization status indicates if the local workspace and the workspace on the

shared repository are synchronized. The synchronization status is indicated through a

specific set of icons.

The WPS also integrates a real-time notification system.

Figure 2-9, “Synchronized workspace” (p. 2-50) and Figure 2-10, “Desynchronized

workspace” (p. 2-50) provide examples for the workspace synchronization status.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-49

Log table

The workspace synchronization status also displays the name of the workspace. On

clicking the name of the shared workspace, a log table is displayed.

The log table shows the actions performed on the shared workspace by the users.

Table 2-1, “Contents of the Log table ” (p. 2-50) lists the contents of a log table.

Table 2-1 Contents of the Log table

Field names Description

Date Indicates the date of the shared workspace change.

Resource Indicates the name of the resource.

Type Indicates the type of the resource (workspace, snapshot).

Action Indicates the Created, modified, deleted, and forced

actions.

User Indicates the name of the user who changed the shared

workspace.

Host Indicates the host name where the shared workspace is

located.

State Indicates the status as Desynchronized or Synchronized.

Figure 2-11, “Log table” (p. 2-51) shows the contents of a log table.

Figure 2-9 Synchronized workspace

Figure 2-10 Desynchronized workspace

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

The following commands are available from the log table contextual menu:

• Purge: Removes entries from the log.

• Retrieve: Retrieves and synchronizes the workspace partially or completely.

The table also provides the Tabular Editor functions. For more information on tabular

editor, see “Tabular editor capabilities” (p. 3-160).

Resource synchronization status

The resource synchronization status refers to the synchronization state between the local

and shared versions of a shared resource.

Table 2-2, “Resource synchronization status” (p. 2-51) describes the various

synchronization states and provides a list of the corresponding icons in the workorder

tree.

Table 2-2 Resource synchronization status

Icon Status Description

Synchronized Indicates if the resource is aligned

with the workspace repository. All

workspace members can access this

version.

Added in repository Indicates if the resource is added in

the repository. To propagate this

addition locally, run the Retrieve

command.

Figure 2-11 Log table

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-51

Table 2-2 Resource synchronization status (continued)

Icon Status Description

Modified in repository Indicates if the new version of the

resource is available in the

repository. To propagate the changes

locally, run the Retrieve command.

Deleted from repository Indicates if the resource is deleted

from repository.

Added locally Indicates if the resource is published

in the repository.

Modified locally Indicates if the modifications to this

resource are published in repository.

Other workspace members have

access to a different version of this

resource.

Deleted locally Indicates if the resource is deleted

locally. As the resource deletion is

not synchronized on the repository,

other workspace members can

accesses the resource.

Conflict Indicates the concurrent activities on

the local version of the resource and

on its shared counterpart. You must

contact the change originator to

resolve the changes.

Examples for the conflict in the

synchronization status are as follows:

• resource deleted locally and

modified in repository

• resource modified locally and

modified in repository

• resource modified locally and

deleted in repository

Unknown Indicates that the resource

synchronization status is not known.

Verify that the connection parameters

to the shared repository are properly

set and ensure that the repository is

accessible.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Synchronization operations

According to the resource synchronization status, the users can perform several

synchronization operations.

Table 2-3, “Synchronization operations” (p. 2-53) provides a list of synchronization

operations available from the WPS GUI.

Table 2-3 Synchronization operations

Operations Description

Publish resource Creates a new shared resource or updates its

shared version according to the local version. The

operation is available only when the local and

shared versions are synchronized.

Retrieve resource Creates or updates the local version of a shared

resource according to its definition in the

repository.

Synchronize workspace Automatically synchronizes resources by running

the required publish and retrieve operations. The

operation is available if the resources are not in a

conflict status.

Overwrite resource Forces the publication of a resource even if a

conflict is detected.

For a WPS session, an active connection with the repository is not mandatory. The

connection can be initiated and released for each individual synchronization operation.

Data sharing deployment

The data sharing environment contains the following entities:

• One or several WPS applications

• Live server workspace repository

• HTTP or HTTPS servers used for the file transfer between the WPS and live server

repository

• One authentication server

The primary main server with the WMS application is required for this deployment.

The data sharing uses the Apache server part of the WMS for the HTTP or HTTPS file

transfer and as a gateway towards the authentication server.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-53

Data sharing integration with the WMS

The integration of WPS data sharing within WMS requires the following operations:

• Deployment of the workspace repository in the WMS main server

• Use of the WMS Apache part as the HTTP or HTTPS server and gateway towards the

WMS authentication system

• Transparent file transfer between the WPS and WMS activation system

Note: The WPS supports secure HTTPS connections for file transfer. Based on the

WMS configuration, the WPS automatically selects the required access method, either

HTTP or HTTPS, for data exchange with the WMS live server.

The WPS supports multiple sessions with several servers simultaneously.

Figure 2-12, “Data sharing integration with WMS” (p. 2-54) illustrates the data sharing

process with the WMS.

Live server repository

The shared workspace directories are available in the WMS live server repository.

Figure 2-12 Data sharing integration with WMS

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Using the following types of shared workspace directories, the users can exchange

workorders or snapshots between the WPS and WMS applications:

• Shared workorder directory

The WPS uses the shared workorder directory for workorder import and export and

the WMS uses the shared workorder directory as a default repository for the

workorder activation.

The shared workorder directory is available at /opt/nortel/data/workspacerepository.

• Shared snapshot directory

The WPS uses the shared snapshot directory for remote snapshot import and the

WMS uses the shared snapshot directory for a scheduled snapshot export.

The shared snapshot directory is available at /opt/nortel/data/sheduledExport.

To use a shared workspace repository, the WPS must establish connection with the live

server. For more information establishing connections with the live server repository, see

“Setting or changing connection parameters” (p. 4-33).

The WPS supports simultaneous sessions with several servers.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS data sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-55

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor

Overview

The WPS tabular editor allows users to copy or paste data in the tabular format from an

external application into the Object editor. The tabular editor supports the creation,

edition, and deletion of the objects and MOIs.

The following operations are available from the contextual menu for the tabular editor:

• Create or update using clipboard data

• Delete instances using clipboard data

Attention: The Bulk provisioning interface must be limited to minimal configuration

data. This interface is not intended to replace the CM XML interface, which is the

standard interface for data exchange.

Tabulated input file format

The copy or paste operation is based on column name matching. The column headers in

the input file must have the same syntax as the tabular editor. The columns that do not

match are ignored.

However, columns can be arranged in any order. The input file is valid if all identifiers are

present. The missing parameters can be derived from the default template.

General principles

WPS functions

Bulk provisioning in tabular editor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS case-insensitive import interface

Overview

The import interface for CM XML files on WPS tools is case-insensitive.

This feature allows a hassle-free import of CM XML files generated manually or from an

external application.

Attention: The CM XML interface on WMS is case-sensitive.

General principles

WPS functions

WPS case-insensitive import interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-57

File browser

Overview

When the files (templates, snapshots, workorders) are loaded in the WPS tools for the

first time, the file browser points to a default directory. Browse the file structure to the

requested file.

On subsequent loads, the file selector window is systematically initialized with the latest

selected folder (within a WPS session).

General principles

WPS functions

File browser

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Parameter search

Overview

The parameter search offers an easy way to find parameters/objects from the network tree

without an advanced knowledge of the data model.

This functionality is available in the following tabs :

• “Network tab” (p. 3-48)

• “Templates tab” (p. 3-55)

• “Datasets tab” (p. 3-58)

• “Audit tab” (p. 3-62)

The search area contains four buttons. The following table details the associated actions.

Table 2-4 Search buttons

Icon Action

Launch the search

Navigate to the previous result

Navigate to the next result

Display search option

It is possible to specify a filter to match only the whole word entered by selecting the

Match whole word radio box option. To display this option click the Display search

option button.

Figure 2-13 Search interface

General principles

WPS functions

Parameter search

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

2-59

It also integrates a suggestion mechanism that will provide a list of parameters which

begin with or contain the characters entered. This suggestion behavior works with at least

3 characters.

The search result will highlight the first occurrence matched within the tree and display

the parameter/object information in the object editor.

Figure 2-14 Search option

Figure 2-15 Search suggestion mechanism

General principles

WPS functions

Parameter search

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

3 3Graphical User Interface

Overview

Purpose

This part describes the WPS graphical user interface main layout.

Contents

WPS main window 3-3

WPS main window 3-4

Menu bar 3-9

File 3-10

Edit 3-13

Go to 3-14

Workorders 3-15

Templates 3-19

Datasets 3-29

Checks 3-30

Audits 3-35

Sharing 3-38

Help 3-41

Tool bar 3-44

Toolbar contents 3-45

Instance browser 3-47

Network tab 3-48

Workorders tab 3-50

Templates tab 3-55

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-1

Datasets tab 3-58

Checks tab 3-60

Audit tab 3-62

Object editor: Overview 3-64

Object editor: Edition 3-68

Workorder Panel 3-76

Template panel 3-83

Dataset conversion panel 3-86

Checks panel 3-88

Audit panel 3-94

Import and export wizard 3-103

Exporting key masks 3-104

Export of snapshots 3-110

Exporting template masks 3-117

Exporting templates 3-120

Export of workorders 3-124

Importing key masks 3-129

Importing reference workorders 3-133

Import of snapshots 3-136

Importing template masks 3-147

Importing templates 3-149

Importing workorders 3-153

Report window and progress bar 3-158

Overview 3-158

Tabular editor capabilities 3-160

Overview 3-160

Help 3-167

Overview 3-167

Graphical User Interface Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS main window

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the main window of the WPS.

Contents

WPS main window 3-4

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-3

WPS main window

Overview

When opening a WPS session, the network tree is empty. The workspace is automatically

initialized with a new empty workorder.

The WPS Main window layout consists of the following five parts:

• “Title bar” (p. 3-4)

• “Menu bar” (p. 3-5)

• “Tool bar” (p. 3-5)

• “Instance browser” (p. 3-6)

• “Working part” (p. 3-7)

Title bar

The WPS title bar indicates the title of the application. The title bar also indicates the

local workspace loaded.

The following figure shows the WPS title bar of WPS for Access Network, for a local

workspace.

Figure 3-1 WPS main window

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

For a shared workspace, you find the name of this workspace at the right side of the

toolbar:

The synchronization status of the selected workorder also appears at the right side of the

workspace name.

Menu bar

This part contains the description of the WPS menus, accessible from the menu bar of

the main window.

The following menus are accessible from the menu bar:

• File

• Edit

• Go to

• Workorders

• Templates

• Datasets

• Checks

• Audits

• Sharing

• Help

Tool bar

The Tool bar consists of the following icons from left to right. It also contains information

about the synchronization status of the workspace in case of shared workspace.

• New workspace

• Open

• Save

• Synchronize shared workspace

Figure 3-2 WPS for Access Network title bar

Figure 3-3 Workspace name

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-5

• Back

• Forward

• Copy

• Paste

• Delete

• Run check

• Compare

• Audit...

Instance browser

The instance browser part is split into the six following parts:

• “Network tab” (p. 3-48).

• “Workorders tab” (p. 3-50).

• “Templates tab” (p. 3-55).

• “Datasets tab” (p. 3-58).

• “Checks tab” (p. 3-60).

• “Audit tab” (p. 3-62)

Figure 3-4 Instance browser

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Working part

The Working part of the main WPS user interface is updated dynamically depending on

the objects selected. The following table describes the various possibilities.

Tabs Selected object Displayed Working part

Workorder tab Workspace folder None

Initial snapshot None

Workorders folder Synchronization state

(Information panel)

Workorder instance Workorder description part

Workorder editor

Network tab Managed Object instance Overview:

• Wizards

• Operations

• Navigation

• Children

• Change History

Edition part:

• Object creation

• Object / Tabular editor

Checks tab Checks folder None

Checks profile folder None

Checks profile instance Check profile part

Checks sessions folder None

Checks sessions instance Check session part

Templates tab Templates folder None

Template instance Object editor part

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-7

Tabs Selected object Displayed Working part

Datasets tab Datasets folder None

Dataset folder instance Dataset conversion part

Managed Object instance Overview part:

• Wizards

• Operations

• Navigation

• Children

• Change History

Edition part:

• Object creation

• Object / Tabular editor

Figure 3-5 Dynamic behavior on MO selection

Graphical User Interface

WPS main window

WPS main window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Menu bar

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the menu options accessible from the WPS menu bar.

Contents

File 3-10

Edit 3-13

Go to 3-14

Workorders 3-15

Templates 3-19

Datasets 3-29

Checks 3-30

Audits 3-35

Sharing 3-38

Help 3-41

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-9

File

Overview

The File menu contains the following commands:

• “New Workspace” (p. 3-10)

• “Open” (p. 3-10)

• “Save” (p. 3-10)

• “Save as” (p. 3-11)

• “Import and export” (p. 3-11)

• “Change settings” (p. 3-11)

• “Set active sub-network” (p. 3-12)

• “Exit” (p. 3-12)

New Workspace

Creates a new workspace.

Attention: Creating a new workspace removes the current workspace content.

Open

Opens an existing workspace.

The following data are restored from the workspace:

• Objects

• Workorders

• Templates

• Datasets

• Check sessions

• Audit sessions

The check profiles are not restored.

Save

Saves the current work (workspace) in a binary file (extension file: <file name>.wps).

The following data are saved in the workspace:

• Objects

• Workorders

• Templates

• Datasets

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Check sessions

• Audit sessions

The check profiles are not saved in the workspace.

Save as

Saves the current work (workspace) in a new binary file.

File extension: <file name>.wps

Import and export

Launches the “Import and export wizard” (p. 3-103).

Change settings

Changes parameters for the following functions:

• Sharing

• Template source

• Wizard (Automatic creation of workorder on opening wizard)

• Transfer (data transfer)

• Network tree (automatic grouping options)

• Dataset tree (automatic grouping options)

• Import and export

Figure 3-6, “Change settings” (p. 3-12) shows the WPS Settings window.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-11

Set active sub-network

Allows you to create, rename, remove, and set a sub-network as an active sub-network.

When you import a snapshot into WPS, you can select the sub-network.

Exit

Exits the WPS tool.

Figure 3-6 Change settings

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Edit

Menu commands

Table 3-1, “Edit menu commands” (p. 3-13) describes the menu options available under

the Edit menu.

Table 3-1 Edit menu commands

Menu command Description

Copy Copies managed objects.

Paste Pastes managed objects.

Delete Deletes items selected in the instance browser.

Use the Delete command to delete the following:

• Managed objects

• Workorders

• Templates

• Datasets

• Check profiles

• Check sessions

• Audit profiles

• Audit sessions

• Audit key masks

• Audit template masks

Rename Renames the selected object.

Compare Compares the selected objects.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Edit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-13

Go to

Go to menu commands

Table 3-2, “Go to menu commands” (p. 3-14) describes the options available in the Go to

menu.

Table 3-2 Go to menu commands

Menu command Description

Back Navigates from a selection to the previous one.

Forward Navigates from a selection to the next one.

Navigate to Navigates from a managed object to another one.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Go to

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workorders

Overview

The Workorders menu contains the following commands:

• “Create new workorder...” (p. 3-15)

• “Insert a new workorder before” (p. 3-15)

• “Set a workorder as current” (p. 3-15)

• “Show current workorder...” (p. 3-16)

• “Add modified objects to Dataset” (p. 3-16)

• “Re-compute planning view” (p. 3-16)

• “Inhibit non significant changes” (p. 3-16)

• “Clear inhibition tags” (p. 3-16)

• “Purge inhibited changes” (p. 3-16)

• “Merge workorders” (p. 3-16)

• “Set as reference workorder” (p. 3-16)

• “Merge network changes” (p. 3-16)

• “Export workorder...” (p. 3-16)

• “Repository” (p. 3-17)

• “Go to network object” (p. 3-17)

• “Inhibit network change” (p. 3-17)

• “Disinhibit network change” (p. 3-17)

• “Inhibit changes for sub-tree” (p. 3-18)

• “Disinhibit changes for sub-tree” (p. 3-18)

Create new workorder...

Creates a new workorder. The workorder is created in the Workorders tree. This new

workorder becomes the current workorder.

Insert a new workorder before

Inserts a new workorder above the selected workorder.

Set a workorder as current

Re-computes the network from the first workorder of the workspace to the selected one.

New user operations and commands will be performed on the new current workorder.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-15

Show current workorder...

Displays the details and the description of the current workorder. The current workorder

is highlighted in the Workorder tree.

Add modified objects to Dataset

Adds the modified objects to an existing dataset or to a new dataset.

Re-compute planning view

Recomputes the network by applying all the workorders. The recomputation takes into

account the inhibitions the user could have done.

Inhibit non significant changes

Inhibits the changes which are not significant.

Clear inhibition tags

Removes permanently all the inhibition tags in the selected workorder. On clicking this

menu option, the Inhibit boxes are cleared in the Object change panel.

Purge inhibited changes

Removes permanently the inhibited changes from all the workorders.

Merge workorders

Replaces all the selected workorders with a new one.

Attention: The selected workorders must be consecutive.

Merge network changes

Replaces all the active workorders with a new one. This new workorder contains all the

differences between the initial snapshot and the current planning view.

Set as reference workorder

This operation sets the selected workorder as a reference workorder that can be used for

cloning operations.

Export workorder...

Exports the current workorder in CM XML format on either local file system or live

server repository. The exported workorders are saved as <file name>-<sub-network-

Name> .xwo

File extension:

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Repository

The Repository sub menu provides the following options:

• Export reference files - Exports reference workorder as CM XML file and input

mask parameters as .xls file.

• Create workorder cloning mask file - Creates bulk inputs file that can be used for

workorder cloning operations.

• Generate workorder(s) - Generates workorders after importing a bulk inputs file.

• Apply session to network- Applies the session created after workorder generation to

the current network view.

• Apply workorders to network - Applies the workorders in the Repository folder to

the current network view.

• Export workorder - Exports the workorders in the Repository folder.

Figure 3-7, “Repository menu options” (p. 3-17) shows the menu commands available in

the Repository sub-menu.

Go to network object

Navigates from the selected object within the workorder to the corresponding object in

the network tree tab of the instance browser.

Inhibit network change

Inhibits a change selected on the workorder editor tree.

Disinhibit network change

Disinhibits a change selected on the workorder editor tree.

Figure 3-7 Repository menu options

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-17

Inhibit changes for sub-tree

Inhibits a change (sub-tree level) selected on the workorder editor tree.

Disinhibit changes for sub-tree

Disinhibits a change (sub-tree level) selected on the workorder editor tree.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Templates

The Templates menu contains the following commands:

• “Set current source” (p. 3-19)

• “Create template...” (p. 3-19)

• “Duplicate template...” (p. 3-21)

• “Propagate template...” (p. 3-21)

• “Compare with template...” (p. 3-22)

• “Set template as default” (p. 3-23)

• “Do not use template as default” (p. 3-24)

• “Export template...” (p. 3-24)

• “Migrate” (p. 3-25)

• “Distill” (p. 3-27)

Set current source

Sets the current source identifier of a template.

This current source is assigned when a template is created.

Create template...

Creates a template from a MOI in the network tree or from a template in the template tree.

Create template from the network tree

The following window appears to create a template from a MOI selected in the network

tree.

Figure 3-8 Set current source

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-19

The subtree can be added to the template by selecting the Capture subtree box.

Create a template from the templates tree

The following window appears to create a template from a template selected in the

template tree.

Figure 3-9 Template from network tree

Figure 3-10 Template from templates tree

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Duplicate template...

Clones an existing template.

Propagate template...

Propagates a template (a selected set of attributes) to a selected managed object.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-21

To propagate an attribute value, click Apply changes.

Attention: Modifying an attribute value from a wizard overrides the template value.

Compare with template...

Compares the attribute values of a managed object with the attribute values of a template.

Figure 3-11 Propagate template

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Set template as default

Sets a template as default (the default template is used at the managed object creation).

The Default box is selected in the template information table.

Figure 3-12 Compare with template

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-23

Do not use template as default

Unsets a template as default.

The Default box is deselected in the template information table

Export template...

Exports a template in XML format.

The following figure illustrates the Export template window.

Figure 3-13 Set template as default

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

The output file is selected from the following window.

File extension: <file name>.xtpl

Migrate

Migrates a template from a source version to another one.

Figure 3-14 Export template

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-25

The following report appears if the template migration is successful.

Figure 3-15 Migrate template

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

After the template migration, the results on the templates are the following:

1. Template instances have been created and updated in the target version. The

recommended values of the templates, including the one equal to the initial model

value, have been migrated according to the Template Migration Policy.

2. The source of new Template instances and updated attribute has been set to the

Default Template source.

3. The details of the operations performed by the migration (granularity attribute) are

available in the migration report.

4. If the source is marked as default and no default template is defined in target for the

object type, the target template is marked as default.

Distill

Distills a template.

Figure 3-16 Migrate template result

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-27

The system removes from the template instances the attribute valued with the model

initial value. It removes the template instance with no valued attribute and no child.

The following report appears if the template distilling is successful.

Figure 3-17 Distill template

Figure 3-18 Distill template result

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Datasets

Datasets menu

Table 3-3, “Datasets menu” (p. 3-29) describes the Datasets menu commands.

Table 3-3 Datasets menu

Menu command Description

Add to dataset Adds the selected managed object to a new or

an existing dataset.

Create inventory dataset Creates a dataset for the hardware inventory

imported into WPS.

Remove from dataset Removes an object from a dataset.

Remove all objects from network Removes all the managed objects of the

selected dataset from the network.

Go to Goes to the selected object of a dataset in the

network tree.

Export as CM XML Exports a dataset in a CM XML file, with the

following option:

• Dataset instances only

• Dataset instances with their subtrees

The exported dataset file is saved as <file

name>.xcm

Export as CSV Exports a dataset in the CSV format.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Datasets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-29

Checks

The Checks menu contains the following commands:

• “Run checks” (p. 3-30)

• “Rerun check session” (p. 3-33)

• “Add erroneous objects to dataset” (p. 3-33)

• “Delete all check sessions” (p. 3-33)

• “Create check profile” (p. 3-33)

• “Duplicate” (p. 3-33)

• “Delete all profiles” (p. 3-33)

• “Set as default ” (p. 3-34)

• “Reset as default ” (p. 3-34)

• “Save all profiles” (p. 3-34)

Run checks

Runs a check session on a set of selected MOIs. An object or a dataset must be selected.

The Checks panel appears.

To run the check, you must click on OK.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

This panel displays the following information:

• Checks performed on: the name of the checked object

• “Model checks” (p. 3-31)

• “Engineering checks” (p. 3-32)

• “Check description” (p. 3-32)

Model checks

You can set or unset the following check options:

• Mandatory attributes defined

• Link targets defined

• Case of link attributes valid (autofix)

Figure 3-19 Checks panel

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-31

• Containment valid (min, max)

• Required components defined

• Create required components (Autofix)

The model checks can be activated or deactivated.

Engineering checks

This part is split into:

• Profile: You can:

– select an existing check profile

You must apply the check profile.

– create a new check profile

• List of checks:

This is the list of checks you can select. By default, all the checks are selected.

You can enable or disable a check.

The Checks session window also displays following two check boxes:

• Enabled - To enable automatic fixing of check errors

• Autofix - To fix check errors automatically

The created Check session is available from the Checks tab. The new check session can

be displayed from the check sessions tree.

Check description

This part gives the following information on the checks:

• Name

Check name

• Id

Check identity

• Domain

BCR

• Description

Check description

• Action

Action to fix the configuration error detected by the check

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Check errors panel

The Check errors panel displays the check failure error messages. Based on the severity

of check failure errors, the following types messages are displayed on the Check session

window:

• Error messages

• Warning messages

• Information messages

Rerun check session

Reruns a check session selected in the tree of the check sessions.

Add erroneous objects to dataset

Adds the erroneous objects in the selected check session to an existing or a new dataset.

Delete all check sessions

Deletes all the check sessions.

Confirmation is requested to the user.

Create check profile

Creates a new check profile.

The Check profile panel appears.

Duplicate

Duplicates the selected check profile.

You must enter a new name for the duplicated profile.

Delete all profiles

Deletes all the existing check profiles.

Figure 3-20 Check profile

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-33

Set as default

Sets a check profile as a default profile.

Reset as default

Resets the profile that is set as default.

Save all profiles

Saves the existing check profiles.

Attention: The check profiles are automatically saved when quitting WPS.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Checks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Audits

Audits menu

The Audits menu contains the following commands:

• “Audit...” (p. 3-35)

• “Re-run audit session” (p. 3-36)

• “Add audited objects to dataset” (p. 3-36)

• “Delete all audit sessions” (p. 3-36)

• “Duplicate” (p. 3-37)

• “Delete all profiles” (p. 3-37)

• “Save all profiles” (p. 3-37)

Audit...

Runs an audit session on a set of selected MOIs. An object or a dataset must be selected

(the network object can be selected).

The Audit panel appears on clicking Audit. Figure 3-21, “Audit panel” (p. 3-36) provides

an example for the Audit panel

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-35

This panel displays the following information:

• Audit performed on: the name of the audited objects

• Audited types

To run the Audit session, click OK.

Re-run audit session

Re-runs an audit session selected in the tree of the audit sessions.

Add audited objects to dataset

Adds the audited objects in the selected audit session to an existing or a new dataset.

Delete all audit sessions

Deletes all the audit sessions.

Figure 3-21 Audit panel

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Duplicate

Creates a copy of an existing audit profile.

Delete all profiles

Deletes all the existing audit profiles.

Save all profiles

Saves the existing audit profiles.

Attention: The audit profiles are automatically saved when quitting WPS.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Audits

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-37

Sharing

Sharing menu

The Sharing menu contains the following commands:

• “Create shared workspace” (p. 3-38)

• “Open shared workspace” (p. 3-39)

• “Delete shared workspace” (p. 3-39)

• “Refresh resource synchronization status” (p. 3-39)

• “Synchronize shared workspace” (p. 3-40)

• “Publish resource” (p. 3-40)

• “Retrieve resource” (p. 3-40)

• “Make local copy” (p. 3-40)

Create shared workspace

Creates a shared workspace.

On clicking Create shared workspace, the Shared connection parameters window is

displayed. You can connect to the WMS main server by using this window as shown in

Figure 3-22, “Connect to a live server” (p. 3-39).

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

After connecting to the live server, you can create a shared workspace.

Open shared workspace

Opens a shared workspace.

Delete shared workspace

Deletes a shared workspace.

Refresh resource synchronization status

Refreshes the resource synchronization status.

Attention: Refresh the synchronization status of a resource before retrieving the

resource.

Figure 3-22 Connect to a live server

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-39

Synchronize shared workspace

Synchronizes the shared workspace.

Publish resource

Publishes a resource into the workspace repository.

Retrieve resource

Retrieves a resource from the workspace repository.

Make local copy

Creates a local copy of the shared workspace.

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Sharing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Help

The Help command allows you to display the version of the tool.

The Help menu contains the following commands:

• “Licenses...” (p. 3-41)

• “Help” (p. 3-42)

• “About” (p. 3-42)

Licenses...

The following screenshot shows the result of the Licenses... command.

Figure 3-23 Licenses: WPS for Small Cells

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-41

Help

The following screenshot shows the result of the Help command.

To know more on the help functionality, see the “Help” (p. 3-167) chapter.

About

The following figure illustrates an example of information provided by this command:

Figure 3-24 Help: WPS for Small Cells

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-25 About

Graphical User Interface

Menu bar

Help

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-43

Tool bar

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the options available form the tool bar.

Contents

Toolbar contents 3-45

Graphical User Interface

Tool bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Toolbar contents

Overview

The WPS floating toolbar can be placed on different borders of the main window.

To move the toolbar, click near the toolbar button and drag and drop the toolbar to the

desired location on the WPS main window.

Figure 3-26, “WPS main Toolbar” (p. 3-45) shows the toolbar.

Table 3-4, “Toolbar” (p. 3-45) lists the toolbar options:

Table 3-4 Toolbar

Options Icon Description

New workspace Creates a new workspace.

Only one workspace can be

opened at a time.

Open... Opens an existing workspace.

Save Saves the current work

(workspace) in a binary file,

.wps. The workspace file

includes the following:

• Templates

• Workorders

• Network

• Datasets

• Check sessions

• Audit sessions

Synchronize shared

workspace

Synchronizes workorders and

workspace with the server.

Figure 3-26 WPS main Toolbar

Graphical User Interface

Tool bar

Toolbar contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-45

Table 3-4 Toolbar (continued)

Options Icon Description

Back and Forward Navigates from one selection

to another one. The user can

easily navigate between

different trees.

Copy Copies an MOI.

Paste Pastes an MOI.

Delete Deletes an object such as

workorder, checks session,

audit session, and MOI.

Run checks... Runs a checks session from a

set of selected MOIs.

Compare... Compares two selected MOIs.

Audit... Audits the selected MOI.

Graphical User Interface

Tool bar

Toolbar contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Instance browser

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the Instance browser menu options.

Contents

Network tab 3-48

Workorders tab 3-50

Templates tab 3-55

Datasets tab 3-58

Checks tab 3-60

Audit tab 3-62

Object editor: Overview 3-64

Object editor: Edition 3-68

Workorder Panel 3-76

Template panel 3-83

Dataset conversion panel 3-86

Checks panel 3-88

Audit panel 3-94

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-47

Network tab

The network tab provides a graphical representation of the entire network in a tree. It

enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to select MOIs in order to

launch commands.

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibilities

• Object's attributes edition

• Wizards and Operations

Figure 3-27 Network tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Copy, paste, and delete

• Export the selected MOI as CMXML file

• Group / Ungroup MOI

The following icon represents a group of nodes.

The Group / Ungroup option is available in the contextual menu for each MOI. Auto

grouping is also available. The threshold can be set in WPS Settings panel. Group /

Ungroup actions do not take threshold into account. The Arrange subtree action takes

threshold into account.

• Group by type

• Ungroup

• Arrange subtree sub-menu

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-49

Workorders tab

WPS provides a graphical representation of the workspace in a tree. It contains the

following:

• The initial snapshot

• A subtree representing the list of created workorders

It enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to launch commands.

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar, or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

• Create a new workorder

• Delete a workorder

• Export all workorders

• Add modified object to dataset

See the “Workorders” (p. 3-15) menu section for more information.

An object can be found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

Figure 3-28 Workorders tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

From a selected workorder, the user can decide to set it as the current one. This function

will re-compute all the network from the initial snapshot to the selected workorder. All

the following workorders will not be taken into account (these workorders will be

displayed in gray color).

The user can inhibit (or disinhibit) changes on a workorder. The workspace can be then

de-synchronized. This means that the current planning view (the network tree) is not the

exact result of the execution of the workorders on the initial snapshot. The planning view

must be re-computed.

Figure 3-29 Workorders - set current

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-51

The workorder with inhibited changes is displayed in blue and the workorder folder is

displayed in red.

Consecutive workorders can be merged in one workorder. This function is accessible in

the contextual menu or the menu bar.

Figure 3-30 Workorders - inhibit changes

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

WPS will prompt the user to save the current workspace.

Figure 3-31 Workorders - merge

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-53

The result is a workorder that contains all the modifications of the selected workorders to

merge.

Figure 3-32 Workorders - merge dialog box

Figure 3-33 Workorders - merge result

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorders tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Templates tab

The templates tab provides a graphical representation of the template in a tree.

It enables the user to navigate among the different instances of template and to launch

commands.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-55

Figure 3-34 Templates tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

• Template's attributes edition

• Set template as default

• Set template as non-default

• Duplicate a template

• Delete a template

• Export a template

• Migrate

• Distill

• Set to current source

The contextual menu available from the Templates tab also provides the options to

expand or collapse the template tree.

For more information on the Templates menu options, see “Templates” (p. 3-19).

An object can be found easily within the templates tree by using the find function at the

top of the Templates tab.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Templates tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-57

Datasets tab

The datasets tab provides a graphical representation of the datasets in a tree. Each dataset

is displayed as a sub-tree containing a set of (heterogeneous) managed objects.

The Datasets tab allows the user to navigate through different instances and launch

commands.

Figure 3-35 Datasets tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

• Launch dataset conversion

• Export as CM XML snapshot

• Remove All objects from network

The following list gives an example of some of the accessible operations:

• Wizards

• Operations

• Navigation

• Object creation

• Component's attributes edition

An object can be found easily within the datasets tree by using the find function at the top

of the Datasets tab.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-59

Checks tab

The checks tab provides a graphical representation of objects related to the checks

functionality in a tree.

The Checks tab contains the following:

• A sub-tree containing the list of checks profiles

• A sub-tree containing the list of check sessions

The Checks tab enables the user to navigate among the different instances and launch

commands.

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

• Create a check profile

• Delete a check profile

• Save all profiles

Figure 3-36 Checks tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Duplicate, rename a check profile

• Delete a check session

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-61

Audit tab

The audit tab provides a graphical representation of objects related to the audit

functionality in a tree.

It contains:

• A sub-tree containing the list of Audit profiles

• A sub-tree containing the list of Audit sessions

• A sub-tree containing the list of Key masks

• A sub-tree containing the list of Template masks

Figure 3-37 Audit tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-62 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

It enables the user to navigate among the different instances and to launch commands.

These commands are accessible by using the menu bar, the tool bar or the contextual

menu. The following list gives an example of some of the possibility:

• Create an audit profile

• Save all profiles

• Duplicate, rename an audit profile

• Re-run an audit session

• Add audited objects to dataset

• Creating key masks

• Creating template masks

An object can be easily found in the tree by using the find function at the top of the tab.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-63

Object editor: Overview

The Object editor: Overview tab displays an object in an overview layout.

Operations

The Operations area contains links to the available operations for the selected object.

The following figure shows the operations available for the FGW.

Figure 3-38 Object editor: Overview panel

Figure 3-39 Operations

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-64 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Navigation

The Navigation area contains links to the objects related to the selected object.

The following figure shows an example of navigation options for FGW

Children

The Children area shows the child objects for a selected object. For each child object, this

table contains the following:

• the number of created objects (if any)

• links to these objects in the network tree

The following figure provides a view of the supported child objects.

Figure 3-40 Navigation

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-65

Change history

The Change history area shows the history of the changes for the selected object and

provides links to the related workorders.

Figure 3-41 Children

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-66 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-42 Change history

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-67

Object editor: Edition

The Edition tab displays an object in a tabular view.

The Object editor: Edition panel contains the following parts:

• “Object creation” (p. 3-69)

• “Object attributes” (p. 3-69)

This part displays in a table the attribute values of the selected object.

• “Attribute details” (p. 3-74)

This part displays the details of a selected attribute.

Figure 3-43 Object editor: Edition panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-68 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Object creation

This part allows you to create the child objects of a selected object.

The following figure shows an example of object creation for a Network.

Object attributes

This part displays in a table the attribute values of the selected object.

This part uses a tabular editor. For more information on the Tabular editor capabilities,

see: “Tabular editor capabilities” (p. 3-160).

The object attributes can be displayed:

• “by instance” (p. 3-69)

• “by type” (p. 3-71)

by instance

The attributes of selected objects are displayed in a table containing for each line the

following columns:

• object name

• attribute name

• attribute value

Figure 3-44 Object creation

Figure 3-45 Object attributes: by instance

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-69

Selecting a MOI in an instance browser (network tree and dataset tree) updates the tabular

editor part. All the instances of the selected type are displayed within the tabular editor.

The table may contain the attribute values of several objects.

You can modify the value of several attributes of the same type in one operation. The

attributes must be selected within the tabular editor.

It is then possible to compare attribute values between one or several objects. This is done

thanks to the sort mechanism on the column headers.

The following screenshot shows a sort from the Attribute column.

Figure 3-46 Multi-value modification from tabular editor

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-70 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

by type

The selected objects in the network tree are displayed in a table containing the following

columns:

• Object type

• Sub-object type

• Version

• Model

• Object attributes: one column per attribute

Only the first selected object type is displayed.

All the objects of the network with the selected type are displayed in this table. For the

selected objects in the network tree, the cell containing the object name is displayed in

blue.

Figure 3-47 Sort mechanism on column header

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-71

Contextual menu by type

When selecting a line in the table, with the option by type ticked off, the following

commands are available from a contextual menu:

Figure 3-48 Object attributes: by type

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-72 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Add selected instances to dataset

• Delete selected instances

• Add shown instances to dataset

• Create/update instances using clipboard

• Delete instances using clipboard

• Table display

• Export table as HTML

Add selected instances to dataset

Adds the selected instances to an existing or a new dataset.

Delete selected instances

Deletes the selected node.

Add shown instances to dataset

Adds all the displayed instances to an existing or a new dataset.

Create/update instances using clipboard

Creates or updates the instances using the clipboard.

The clipboard must contain a table formatted as follows:

• Identification columns are mandatory.

• A version column, model column and attribute column may be specified if needed.

• A tabulation separates each column.

Delete instances using clipboard

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-73

The clipboard must contain a table formatted as follows:

• Identification columns are mandatory.

• A version column and attribute columns may be specified if needed.

• A tabulation separates each column.

Table display

Refer to the Tabular editor capabilities: “Table display” (p. 3-161)

Export table as HTML

Refer to the Tabular editor capabilities: “Export table as HTML” (p. 3-163)

Attribute details

This part displays the details of the selected attribute(s):

• attribute description (type, range)

• more detailed attribute description (via the "Description" button)

• edition field allowing you to modify the value

The Unset button allows you to unset a parameter value. In case of multi-edition on

different kinds of attributes, a message warns you that no operation is available.

On selecting an attribute, either by instance or by type, the impact information appears

along with the attribute description and status.

Figure 3-49 Attribute details

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-74 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Attribute input panel data types

A "Hex" check box allows you to switch the input/output of the attribute input panel from

default data type (described in the RAN Model) to hexadecimal. The persisted data types

and the data types exported in the CM XML file are still those defined in the RAN Model.

This functionality is applicable to all data types compatible with an integer:

• Decimal (Integer only. Float numbers are not supported).

• Long Integer.

• Signed Integer.

• BitString.

• Bcd.

Figure 3-50 Attribute description

Figure 3-51 Attribute input panel data types

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Object editor: Edition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-75

Workorder Panel

The Workorder panel contains the two following parts:

• “Workorder description panel” (p. 3-77)

• “Workorder editor panel” (p. 3-78)

This panel appears on workorder selection

Figure 3-52 Workorder panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-76 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workorder description panel

This panel displays information about the selected workorder within the workspace tree.

This panel is split into:

• Name

Name of the workorder. By default the name is new workorder.

• Originator

Originator name. You can fill in or modify this information (optional).

• Creation date

The date of creation. The system automatically computes this information.

• Description

Workorder description. You can fill in or modify this information (optional).

You must click Apply to save the modifications.

Figure 3-53 Workorder description panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-77

Workorder editor panel

This panel contains the following parts:

• “Network change tree” (p. 3-79)

• “Object change panel” (p. 3-81)

Figure 3-54 Workorder editor panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-78 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Network change tree

The Network change tree displays the objects that are in the following status:

• created

• updated

• deleted

Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder

On selecting a change in the network change tree, the following commands are available

from a contextual menu:

Figure 3-55 Network change tree

Figure 3-56 Inhibit/Disinhibit changes in a workorder

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-79

The following commands are available from the contextual menu:

• Expand subtree

Expands the subtree of the network change tree.

• Collapse subtree

Collapses the subtree of the network change tree.

• Go to network object

Goes to the associated object in the network tree.

• Inhibit network change

Inhibit the selected network change without including the subtree.

• Disinhibit network change

Disinhibit the selected network change without including the subtree.

• Inhibit changes for subtree

Inhibit the selected network changes including the subtree.

• Disinhibit changes for subtree

Disinhibit the selected network changes including the subtree.

The workspace can be then desynchronized. The current planning view is not the exact

result of the execution of the workorders on the initial snapshot.

The planning view must be recomputed. This is possible from the "Workorders" object.

An example of unsynchronized workspace is provided in the following figure.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-80 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workorders with inhibited changes are displayed in blue within the workorder tree. The

workorder folder is displayed in red.

Object change panel

The object change panel contains the following columns:

• Type

Object type

• Object

Object modified

• Method

Operation:

– create

– delete

– update

Figure 3-57 Unsynchronized workspace

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-81

• Attribute

Object attribute modified

• Previous value

Attribute value before change

• Value

New attribute value

• Inhibit

Change in the workorder is inhibited or not.

• Model

Parameter default value in the model

• Template

Parameter default value in the template

The model and template columns are displayed by selecting the show model/templates

value box.

The impact information is displayed on selecting the Show impact check box.

Tabular editor

The object changes are displayed in a tabular editor.

For more information on the tabular editor capabilities, see “Tabular editor capabilities”

(p. 3-160)

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Workorder Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-82 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Template panel

The template edition panel allows you to edit the values of the template attributes.

This panel contains the two following parts:

• “Template information panel” (p. 3-83)

• “Template edition panel” (p. 3-84)

Template information panel

The template information panel is shown in the following screenshot.

This table contains the following columns:

• Version

Version of the object related to the selected template

• Model

Model of the object related to the selected template

• Short type

Type (in short) of the object related to the selected template

• Name

Template name

• Source

Source related to the template. It is assigned at the template import or creation.

• Default

Indicates if the template is a default template. It can be changed.

Figure 3-58 Template information panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-83

• Hierarchy

Template hierarchy. It indicates if the template has a subtree.

• Long type

Type (complete) of the object related to the selected template

Template edition panel

This table contains the following columns:

• Object

Object related to the template

• Attribute

Object attribute in the template

• Value

Attribute value in the template

You can change the attribute value. See: Figure 3-60, “Attribute value change”

(p. 3-85)

• Included

Figure 3-59 Template edition panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-84 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Indicates if the attribute is included in the template. Included attributes are bolded.

This state can be changed manually.

• Source

Source related to the setting of the attribute.

On selecting an attribute either by instance or by type, impact information is displayed

along with attribute description and status.

Figure 3-60 Attribute value change

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Template panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-85

Dataset conversion panel

The Dataset conversion panel is displayed on the dataset selection (within the dataset

tab). You must select a dataset in the dataset tree.

This panel allows you to convert a dataset. The result of the conversion (set of MOIs) can

be saved into a new dataset or into the current selected dataset.

To convert a dataset, you must run the following actions:

• Select a dataset instance in the dataset instance browser

• Select the type of object from which the navigation has to start

• Select the navigator to use to perform the conversion

Figure 3-61 Dataset conversion panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Dataset conversion panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-86 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Select the type of objects to keep in the output dataset

• Select the dataset where objects are added

On selecting an attribute either by instance or by type, impact information is displayed

along with attribute description and status.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Dataset conversion panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-87

Checks panel

Overview

The Checks panel contains the following parts:

• Check profile panel

• Check session panel

Check profile panel

Figure 3-62, “Check profile panel” (p. 3-88) provides a view of the Check profile panel.

The check profile allows the user to perform the following activities:

• Enable or disable a check

• Enable or disable all the checks

• Activate or deactivate the autofix characteristic for a check

Figure 3-62 Check profile panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-88 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

The check profile panel provides a tabular editor. For more information on tabular editor,

see “Tabular editor capabilities” (p. 3-160).

Contextual menu

“Contextual menu” (p. 3-89) describes the commands available from the contextual menu

of the Check profile panel:

Menu command Description

Enable Enables the check in the check profile.

Disable Disables the check in the check profile.

Enable all Enables all the checks in the check profile.

Disable all Disables all the checks in the check profile.

Fix ON Sets the autofix capability in the check profile.

Fix OFF Unsets the autofix capability in the check profile.

Table display Display the details in a tabular format. For more information, see

“Table display” (p. 3-161).

Export Table Enables you to export the table in .html, .xls, or .xlsx formats.

Check session panel

Figure 3-63, “Check session panel” (p. 3-90) provides a view of the Check session panel.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-89

Figure 3-63 Check session panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-90 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Table 3-5, “Check session panel contents” (p. 3-91) describes the contents of the Check

session panel.

Table 3-5 Check session panel contents

Contents of the Check

session panel

Description

Check session identification This part contains the following items:

• Session performed on- Indicates the object selected for

the check.

• Sub-network - Indicates the sub-network on which the

check session is run.

• Creation date - Indicates the date when the check was

created.

On clicking Re-run check session, WPS reruns the selected

check session.

On clicking Save report, the check session report is saved in

the XML format.

Check errors The details of the checks and check errors are displayed in the

following tabs:

• Failures

• Checks

• Difference

Check description The following information on a check is available in the

Check Description part:

• Name - Name of the check

• Id - Identity of the check

• Description - Description of the check

• Action - Action required to resolve the check error.

The following check boxes are available for filtering check

errors:

• Hide model errors - Selecting this check box hides model

errors.

• Hide Warnings - Selecting this check box hides warnings

• Hide info messages - Selecting this check box hides

information messages.

Checks status Displays the status of the checks that are run by WPS.

The Checks status panel also displays the number of errors,

warnings, and information messages for a check session

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-91

Check errors

A part of the Checks session panel provides a list of the checks run, checks that failed,

and difference, if any, between two check sessions.

“Check errors” (p. 3-92) describes the contents of the check errors part.

Tab Description

Failures Indicates the number of checks that failed and provides details on

the check errors.

The table contains the following columns:

• Severity: Indicates the severity of the error

• Check ID: Refers to identity of the check.

This field is empty for a model check. The model checks are

inferred from the model and are automatically performed on

each check session.

• Domain: Indicates the domain

• Object: Refers the object selected for the check

• Attribute: Refers to the object attribute related to the check

• Message: Describes the error detected in the check

• Fixed: Highlights status of autocorrection if the autofix is

enabled for the check.

Checks Provides details about the errors in a check session.

The check session details table contains the following columns

• Category: Indicates the category of the check

• Check ID: Indicates the identity of the check

• Error: Indicates error, if any.

• Warning: Indicates warning, if any

• Info: Indicates information messages, if any

• Domain: Indicates the domain

• Check: Provides a description of the check

• Enabled: Indicates if the check is enabled.

• Autofix: Indicates if the autocorrection was enabled for any

check.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-92 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Tab Description

Difference Indicates the differences, if any, from the previous check sessions:

The differences table contains the following columns:

• Changes - Indicates the changes

• Severity: Indicates the severity of the check errors

• Check ID: Indicates the identity of the check

• Domain: Indicates the domain

• Object: Refers to the object selected for the check

• Attribute: Refers to the object attribute related to the check

• Message: Describes the error detected in the check

Contextual menu

The following commands are available from the contextual menu:

• Add selected objects to dataset - Adds the objects related to the selected errors to

an existing or new dataset.

• Add shown objects to dataset - Adds all the objects displayed in the check session

errors to a dataset.

• Table display - Displays the content in the WPS tabular editor.

• Export table.. - Exports the selected check session in the Excel format.

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Checks panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-93

Audit panel

• “Audit profile panel” (p. 3-94)

• “Audit session panel” (p. 3-96)

• “Key mask panel” (p. 3-99)

• “Template mask panel” (p. 3-101)

Audit profile panel

The audit profile allows the user to achieve the following operations:

• include/exclude a template

• include/exclude all the templates

• associate a template mask to a template

• filter on cell value for a template

The audit profile panel uses a tabular editor.

For more information on the tabular editor capabilities, see: “Tabular editor capabilities”

(p. 3-160)

Contextual menu from Audit profile panel

When selecting an audit profile in the audit profile panel, the following commands are

available from a contextual menu:

Figure 3-64 Audit profile panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-94 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• Include

Includes the template in the Audit profile.

• Exclude

Excludes the template in the Audit profile.

• Include all

Includes all the templates in the Audit profile.

• Exclude all

Excludes all the templates in the Audit profile.

• Duplicate

Duplicates a template.

• Remove

Removes a template.

• Table display

Refer to “Table display” (p. 3-161) in the tabular editorcapabilities.

• Export table as HTML

Exports the selected check profile in HTML format.

Figure 3-65 Contextual menu from audit profile panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-95

Audit session panel

The Audit Session panel contains the following parts:

• “Audit session identification” (p. 3-97)

• “Report tab” (p. 3-97)

• “Audited types tab” (p. 3-99)

You can save the Audit session in a zip file.

Figure 3-66 Audit session panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-96 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Audit session identification

This part contains the following items:

• Session performed on

Identity of the object selected for the audit

• Creation date

Creation date of the audit

• Re-run audit session

Re-runs a selected audit session.

• Save audit session

Saves the audit session in a zip file format.

Report tab

This panel is split in two tab:

Figure 3-67 Audit session identification

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-97

This panel is the report generated by the audit session. It consists in html pages with links

which allow an easy navigation in the audited object(s).

Figure 3-68 Report tab

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-98 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Audited types tab

This tab displays the options defined in the profile chosen when the audit is launched.

Key mask panel

Figure 3-69 Audited types tab

Figure 3-70 Audit key mask panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-99

In this panel, a set of filter rules can be defined on the id of an object. This key mask can

be then applied to a template on the “Audit profile panel” (p. 3-94).

This part contains the following items:

• Case sensitive

Activates or deactivates the case sensitive

• AND/OR

Logical conditions between the different rules

• Add

Adds a condition in the table

• Remove

Removes a condition in the table

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-100 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Template mask panel

Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel

When selecting an audit profile in the audit profile panel, the following commands are

available from a contextual menu:

Figure 3-71 Template mask panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-101

• Include selected attribute

Includes the selected template attribute in the Audit profile.

• Exclude selected attribute

Excludes the selected template attribute in the Audit profile.

• Table display

Refer to “Table display” (p. 3-161) in the tabular editor capabilities.

• Export table as HTML

Exports the selected check profile in HTML format.

Figure 3-72 Contextual menu from Audit Template Masks panel

Graphical User Interface

Instance browser

Audit panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-102 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Import and export wizard

Overview

Purpose

A dedicated wizard allows you to launch import and export operations. This wizard helps

you to define the operations to perform.

Contents

Exporting key masks 3-104

Export of snapshots 3-110

Exporting template masks 3-117

Exporting templates 3-120

Export of workorders 3-124

Importing key masks 3-129

Importing reference workorders 3-133

Import of snapshots 3-136

Importing template masks 3-147

Importing templates 3-149

Importing workorders 3-153

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-103

Exporting key masks

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the key masks.

Note: The export of key masks allows the user to export key filter defined in the

Audit tab in the CM XML format.

Steps to export key masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the File menu, select Import and export.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-104 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Import and export wizard: export key masks window appears as

shown in Figure 3-73, “Import and export wizard: export key masks” (p. 3-105).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Export key masks option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

Figure 3-73 Import and export wizard: export key masks

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-105

Result: The Export key masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-74, “Export key masks (local file system)” (p. 3-106).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Browse to select a file.

Figure 3-74 Export key masks (local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-106 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Select a file window appears as shown in Figure 3-75, “Select a file”

(p. 3-107).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter a filename to export the key masks.

Figure 3-75 Select a file

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-107

Result: The Export key masks : Start window appears as shown in Figure 3-76,

“Export key masks : Start” (p. 3-108).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Start to launch the key masks export.

Figure 3-76 Export key masks : Start

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-108 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The progress and completion of the key masks export is displayed as shown in

Figure 3-77, “Export key masks: Completed” (p. 3-109).

You can save the report related to the key masks export (XML format).

Figure 3-77 Export key masks: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-109

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export of snapshots

The export of snapshots allows you to export snapshots in the CM XML format.

To export a snapshot, you must run the following actions:

• In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Figure 3-78, “Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot” (p. 3-111) window

appears.

• Select the Export snapshot option.

• Click Next.

The Figure 3-79, “Export snapshot (local file system)” (p. 3-112) window appears.

• Click Browse to select the path to export the network snapshots. Enter a filename to

export the snapshots.

• Click Next. The Figure 3-80, “Edit Filter” (p. 3-113) window appears.

• Select the filter by clicking on Edit filter tab. The Figure 3-81, “Select Filter”

(p. 3-114) window appears.

• Select a subset of top-level objects to export.

• Click Start. The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in the

Figure 3-83, “Export snapshot: Completed” (p. 3-116) window.

• You can save the report related to the snapshot export (XML format).

Note: You can set the filter to provide snapshots based on category of small cells. The

categories of small cells are: H- Home, E- Enterprise, M- Metro, and LRM – Metro

(Light Radio).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-110 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-78 Import and Export Wizard: export snapshot

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-111

Figure 3-79 Export snapshot (local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-112 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-80 Edit Filter

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-113

Figure 3-81 Select Filter

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-114 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-82 Export snapshot: Start

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-115

Figure 3-83 Export snapshot: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-116 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Exporting template masks

Purpose

The purpose of this section is describe the procedure for exporting template masks from

the WPS.

Note: The export of template masks allows you to export templates filter defined in

the Audit tab in the CM XML format.

Steps to export template masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Import and export wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Export template masks option and click Next.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-117

Result: The Export template masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-84, “Export template masks (local file system)” (p. 3-118).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse to select a file.

The Select a file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter a filename to export the template.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Start to launch the template export.

Figure 3-84 Export template masks (local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-118 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

You can save the report related to the template export (XML format).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-119

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting templates

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to export templates from the WPS.

The export template operation allows you to export templates in the CM XML format.

Template export operation

You can use any of the following options to export the WPS templates:

• The Export templates option in the Import and Export wizard.

• The Export template option, which is available from the contextual menu on

selecting a template in the templates tree and from the Templates main menu.

• The Export all templates option available from the Templates root contextual menu.

This section describes the procedure to export templates through the Import and Export

wizard.

Steps to export templates

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and export wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Export template option and click Next.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-120 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Select source for export window appears as shown in Figure 3-85,

“Select source for export” (p. 3-121).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the template sources to export.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Next.

The Export templates (local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-86,

“Export templates (local file system)” (p. 3-122).

Figure 3-85 Select source for export

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-121

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Browse to select a file.

The Select a file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter a filename to export the template.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Start to launch the template export.

The progress and completion of the template export is shown as displayed in Figure 3-87,

“Export template: Completed” (p. 3-123).

Figure 3-86 Export templates (local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-122 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

You can save the report related to the template export (XML format).

Figure 3-87 Export template: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-123

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Export of workorders

The export of workorders allows you to export workorders in the CM XML format.

To export a workorder, run the following actions:

• In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Figure 3-88, “Import and Export Wizard: export workorder” (p. 3-125) window

appears.

• Select the Export workorder option.

• Click Next.

The Figure 3-89, “Export workorders (local file system)” (p. 3-126) window appears.

• Click Browse to select a file.

The Figure 3-90, “Select a file” (p. 3-126) window appears.

• Enter a filename to export the snapshots.

The Figure 3-91, “Export workorder: Start” (p. 3-127) window appears.

• Click Start to launch the snapshot export.

The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in the Figure 3-92,

“Export workorder: Completed” (p. 3-128) window.

• You can save the report related to the workorder export (XML format).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-124 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-88 Import and Export Wizard: export workorder

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-125

Figure 3-89 Export workorders (local file system)

Figure 3-90 Select a file

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-126 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-91 Export workorder: Start

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-127

Figure 3-92 Export workorder: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Export of workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-128 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Importing key masks

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import key masks into the WPS.

Note: The import of key masks allows the user to import a key mask file into a

workspace in the CM XML format.

Steps to import key masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Import and Export wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import key masks option as shown in Figure 3-93, “Import and Export wizard:

Import key masks” (p. 3-130).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-129

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

The Import key masks: (Local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-94,

“Import key masks: (Local file system)” (p. 3-131).

Figure 3-93 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-130 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Browse.

The Select a CM XML key mask file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the directory and the key mask file to import.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Start to start the import.

Figure 3-94 Import key masks: (Local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-131

You can save the report related to the key mask import (in XML format).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-132 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing reference workorders

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing a reference

workorder in the CM XML format.

For information about creating and exporting a reference workorder, see “Managing

reference workorders ” (p. 4-84).

Steps to import a reference workorder

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the File menu, select the Import and export option.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import reference workorder option and click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse and select the workorder to import and click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify the folder name, under which the reference workorder must be imported. Figure

3-95, “Import reference workorder - Specify folder name” (p. 3-134) provides an example

for the folder name.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-133

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To start the import, click Start.

When the import is completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To view the workorder, click the Workorder tab and navigate to the appropriate directory

under the Repository folder.

Figure 3-96, “Reference Workorder ” (p. 3-135) shows the location of the reference

workorders imported into the WPS.

Figure 3-95 Import reference workorder - Specify folder name

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-134 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-96 Reference Workorder

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-135

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Import of snapshots

The import of snapshots allows you to import snapshots into a workspace, in the CM

XML format.

To import a snapshot, you must perform the following actions:

1. In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Figure 3-97, “Import and export wizard: import snapshot” (p. 3-137) window

appears.

2. Select any of the following sources (Figure 3-98, “Source” (p. 3-137)):

• Local file system

• Live server repository

3. Click Next.

The Figure 3-99, “Import snapshot: mode selection” (p. 3-138) window appears.

4. Select any of the following options:

• Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders

• Merge with planned network

• Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders

• Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot

• Delete with planned network

5. Click Next.

The Figure 3-100, “Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)”

(p. 3-139) window appears, if you have selected the local file system.

The Figure 3-101, “Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)”

(p. 3-140) window appears, if you have selected the live network repository.

6. Click Browse.

The Figure 3-102, “Select a CM XML snapshot” (p. 3-141) window appears.

7. Select the directory and the snapshot to import. Click Open.

The Figure 3-103, “Import snapshot (snapshot selected)” (p. 3-142) appears.

8. Click Next.

The Figure 3-104, “Select subset of objects to import” (p. 3-143) window appears, to

select a subset of the top-level objects to import.

9. To filter objects a top level, click Edit filter or select an object and click Edit

advanced filter....

The Figure 3-105, “Top-Level objects analysis” (p. 3-144) window appears.

10. You can select a subset of top-level objects to import.

11. Click Next.

The Figure 3-106, “Import snapshot: Start” (p. 3-145) window appears.

You can save the workspace.

12. Click Start to start the snapshot import.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-136 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

The progress and completion of the import is displayed in the Figure 3-107, “Import

snapshot: Completed” (p. 3-146) window.

13. You can save the report related to the snapshot import (XML format).

Figure 3-97 Import and export wizard: import snapshot

Figure 3-98 Source

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-137

Figure 3-99 Import snapshot: mode selection

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-138 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-100 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-139

Figure 3-101 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-140 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-102 Select a CM XML snapshot

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-141

Figure 3-103 Import snapshot (snapshot selected)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-142 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-104 Select subset of objects to import

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-143

Figure 3-105 Top-Level objects analysis

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-144 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-106 Import snapshot: Start

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-145

Figure 3-107 Import snapshot: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Import of snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-146 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Importing template masks

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import template masks into the WPS.

Note: The import of templates allows you to import template masks into a workspace

in the CM XML format.

Steps to import template masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import template masks option and click Next.

Result: The Import template masks (Local file system) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse to select the directory and the template to import.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Start to start the change import.

The progress and completion of the import appears as shown in Figure 3-108, “Import

template masks: Completed” (p. 3-148).

You can save the report related to the template import (in the XML format).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-147

Figure 3-108 Import template masks: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing template masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-148 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing templates

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import templates into the WPS.

The import of templates allows you to import templates into a workspace in the CM XML

format.

Import the following types of templates into the WPS:

• RAN templates

• RRM templates

• PP templates

Steps to import templates

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and export window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import template option and click Next.

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-149

Result: The window for file selection appears as shown in Figure 3-109, “Import

templates: file selection” (p. 3-150).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Next.

The template is imported.

The template analysis window appears as shown in Figure 3-110, “Template file analysis”

(p. 3-151).

Figure 3-109 Import templates: file selection

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-150 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Start to start the import.

The progress and completion of the import is displayed as shown in the Figure 3-111,

“Import template: Completed” (p. 3-152).

Figure 3-110 Template file analysis

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-151

You can save the report related to the template import (in the XML format).

Figure 3-111 Import template: Completed

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-152 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing workorders

Purpose

This procedure describes how to import workorders into WPS using the Import and

Export wizard.

Steps to import workorders into WPS

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and export window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import workorders option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select any of the following sources:

• Local file system

• Live server repository

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Next.

• On selecting Local file system as the source, the Import workorders (Local file

system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-112, “Import workorders (Local file

system)” (p. 3-154)

Click Browse to navigate to the local directory and select the workorder to import.

• On selecting the Live server repository, the Import workorders (Live server

repository) window appears as shown in Figure 3-113, “Import workorders (Live

server repository)” (p. 3-155).

Select the workorder to import from the live server repository as shown in Figure

3-114, “Import workorders: workorder selection” (p. 3-157).

Note: If the live server repository is not defined, click define repository and specify

the server name, server type, url, username, password and sub-network. For more

information on defining live server repository, see “Configuring WPS settings for

network operations” (p. 4-9).

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-153

Figure 3-112 Import workorders (Local file system)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-154 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-113 Import workorders (Live server repository)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-155

Figure 3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection (1 of 2)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-156 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Next.

The WPS wizard window prompts you to save the workspace.

Save the workspace if required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Start to start the workorder import.

The window displaying the progress and completion status of the import appears.

If required, save the report related to the workorder import in the XML format.

Figure 3-114 Import workorders: workorder selection (2 of 2)

Graphical User Interface

Import and export wizard

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-157

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Report window and progress bar

Overview

For long data processing, the tool displays a "progress bar". This gives a better view of

the processing progress.

During import and export operations, the progress bar is integrated into the report

window.

Here are examples of such report window and progress bars:

Figure 3-115 Report window example

Graphical User Interface

Report window and progress bar

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-158 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-116 Progress bar example

Graphical User Interface Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-159

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

The WPS tabular editor is a graphical table component embedded into other graphical

components.

To access to the tabular editor, you must select the Edition tab in the “Object editor:

Edition” (p. 3-68).

The tabular editor feature offers the following filtering capabilities:

• “Filtering on cell” (p. 3-160)

• “Filtering from header column” (p. 3-164)

• “Filtering on Combo box value” (p. 3-165)

Filtering on cell

To filter on a cell, you must run the following actions:

• Select a cell in a table.

• Right-click and select any of the following commands from the contextual menu:

– “Table display” (p. 3-161)

– “Export table as HTML” (p. 3-163)

The following figure shows the commands available for filtering a table cell.

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-160 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Table display

The following commands are available from the Table display command:

• Filter on cell value

• Set filter

• Remove filter

• Remove all filters

• Sort ascending

• Sort descending

• Fit width to content

• Autoresize table

Filter on cell value

Displays the table filtered on the selected cell value.

A filtering example is shown in the following screenshot.

Figure 3-117 Filtering on cell

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-161

The tabular editor with filters have the filtered column headers highlighted in green.

Set filter

Sets a filter in a table.

An example of filter setting is shown in the following screenshot.

Remove filter

Removes a filter set by the user.

Remove all filters

Removes all the filters set by the user.

Sort ascending

Sorts the selected column in ascending order.

Figure 3-118 Filter on cell value example

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-162 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Sort descending

Sorts the selected column in descending order.

Fit width to content

Fits the width of the selected column to its content.

Autoresize table

Resizes the table, according to the content of the columns.

Export table as HTML

Exports the selected table in the HTML format.

The following window appears to define the output HTML file.

An example of HTML output file is shown in the following screenshot.

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-163

Filtering from header column

The following screenshot gives the commands available when filtering from header

column.

Figure 3-119 Example HTML output

Figure 3-120 Filtering from header column

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-164 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

To filter a table from the header column, run the following actions:

• Select a header column of the table.

• Right-click and select any of the following commands:

– Set filter

– Remove filter

– Remove all filters

– Sort ascending

– Sort descending

– Fit width to content

– Autoresize table

– “Export table as HTML” (p. 3-163)

Filtering on Combo box value

WPS offers the possibility to filter the combo box drop down list. It allows the customer

to reduce the number of choice by defining one or several rules.

To filter a combo box drop down list, run the following actions:

Attention: The combo box of interest cannot be selected to set the filter.

• Right-click on a combo box.

• The following commands are available:

– “Set list filter” (p. 3-166)

– “Propagate list filter to column” (p. 3-166)

– “Remove list filter” (p. 3-166)

– “Remove all list filters” (p. 3-166)

– “Table display” (p. 3-161)

– “Export table as HTML” (p. 3-163)

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-165

Set list filter

This commands allows the user to set one or several filter(s), see Set filter for the GUI

related screenshot.

Propagate list filter to column

This command allows the user to propagate the filter defined on a combo box to the

whole column. All the combo box of the column will be filtered.

Remove list filter

This command removes the filter(s) of the current combo box.

Remove all list filters

This command removes the filter(s) of all the combo box in the current column.

Figure 3-121 Contextual menu on combo box

Graphical User Interface

Tabular editor capabilities

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-166 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Help

Overview

This section details the help facilities integrated in the WPS tool. The WPS help is

accessible from the Help menu or by pressing F1.

Floating help window

The following button opens the WPS help on a floating window:

The following window appears:

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-167

Help toolbar

The following buttons are available on the toolbar:

Figure 3-122 Floating help window

Figure 3-123 Help toolbar

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-168 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

• “Home” (p. 3-169)

• “Find” (p. 3-170)

• “Back/Forward” (p. 3-171)

• “Help navigation” (p. 3-171)

Home

Displays the help home page.

Figure 3-124 Help home page

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-169

Find

The find function allows the user to search one or several words on the integrated RAN

model.

The user can access to a help window about the search functionality by clicking on the

Search Help link.

Figure 3-125 Help find panel

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-170 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Back/Forward

Navigates from one help page to another one. The user can easily navigate between the

different pages.

Help navigation

Click on Model for BCR to have information on the object types.

Figure 3-126 Search help

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-171

Click on an object to know the attributes of this object:

Figure 3-127 Model for BCR help

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-172 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 3-128 Help screen for an object

Graphical User Interface

Help

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

3-173

Graphical User Interface Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-174 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

4 4General WPS operating

procedures

Overview

Purpose

General WPS operating procedures include commonly used procedures for managing the

WPS tool.

Contents

Workspace management 4-5

Creating a new workspace 4-6

Opening a workspace 4-7

Saving a workspace 4-8

Configuring WPS settings for network operations 4-9

Importing network snapshots 4-11

Importing tabular from Excel file 4-20

Creating a sub-network 4-21

Setting a sub-network as active 4-22

Renaming a sub-network 4-23

Removing a sub-network 4-24

Exporting a snapshot 4-25

Data sharing management 4-32

Setting or changing connection parameters 4-33

Creating shared workspace 4-36

Opening shared workspace 4-37

Removing shared workspace 4-38

Synchronizing workspace 4-39

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-1

Refreshing resource synchronization status 4-40

Publishing resource 4-41

Retrieving resource 4-42

Removing shared resource 4-43

Making a local copy 4-44

Delivering workorder for activation 4-45

Templates management 4-46

Setting the default source 4-47

Importing templates 4-48

Creating a template 4-50

Creating template from a network/dataset object 4-51

Adding a child to a template instance 4-52

Removing a template instance 4-53

Duplicating a template 4-54

Migrating a template 4-55

Distilling a template 4-56

Comparing templates 4-57

Updating template 4-58

Setting template as default 4-59

Unsetting a template as default 4-60

Renaming a template 4-61

Deleting a template 4-62

Exporting templates 4-63

External interfaces 4-64

Importing a configuration file 4-65

Exporting a configuration file 4-67

Exporting table 4-69

Workorder management 4-70

Importing workorders 4-71

Importing reference workorders 4-72

Creating a workorder 4-75

Modifying a workorder 4-76

Merging workorders 4-78

General WPS operating procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Finalizing workorders 4-79

Exporting a single workorder 4-81

Exporting multiple workorders 4-82

Managing reference workorders 4-84

Deleting a workorder 4-88

Datasets management 4-89

Creating a new dataset from MOIs 4-90

Creating a new dataset from a current one 4-91

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information 4-92

Adding MOIs from the network tree 4-94

Adding MOI(s) by conversion 4-95

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset 4-96

Removing MOIs from a Dataset 4-97

Exporting a dataset 4-98

Deleting a Dataset 4-99

Checks management 4-100

Creating a check profile 4-101

Updating a check profile 4-102

Copying a check profile 4-103

Copying check profiles between WPS applications 4-104

Running checks on MOIs 4-105

Running checks on dataset objects 4-106

Re-running a check session 4-107

Running checks on several object instances 4-108

Deleting a check session 4-109

Audit management 4-110

Creating an audit profile 4-111

Updating an audit profile 4-112

Duplicating an audit profile 4-113

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications 4-114

Auditing network objects 4-115

Auditing dataset objects 4-116

Re-running an audit session 4-117

General WPS operating procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-3

Deleting an audit session 4-118

Exporting key masks 4-119

Importing key masks 4-125

Network objects (network MOI) management 4-129

Creating a network object 4-130

Duplicating a network object 4-131

Modifying a network object 4-132

Modifying a network object based on a template 4-133

Comparing a network object with a template 4-134

Comparing two object instances 4-135

Comparing attributes for an object 4-136

Exporting a network object 4-137

Deleting a network object 4-138

Change attribute value 4-139

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab 4-140

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab 4-141

Changing attribute value using a template 4-142

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class 4-143

Help on Object Types 4-144

Browsing a Network Object 4-145

Searching for an Object 4-146

General WPS operating procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Workspace management

Overview

Purpose

The WPS workspace is created for network operations and workorder execution.

The workspace file is not compatible between different release versions of the WPS

application. To import snapshots or workorders of a different release version, use the

Import and Export... wizard.

Contents

Creating a new workspace 4-6

Opening a workspace 4-7

Saving a workspace 4-8

Configuring WPS settings for network operations 4-9

Importing network snapshots 4-11

Importing tabular from Excel file 4-20

Creating a sub-network 4-21

Setting a sub-network as active 4-22

Renaming a sub-network 4-23

Removing a sub-network 4-24

Exporting a snapshot 4-25

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-5

Creating a new workspace

Purpose

When you create a new workspace, it is empty. It does not contain a Network instance, a

Workorder or a Dataset.

The loaded Templates are stored independently of the current workspace.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, either select File > New workspace, or click the New

workspace icon.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Yes.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Creating a new workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Opening a workspace

Purpose

Open a workspace by loading a saved workspace file (<file name>.wps).

Attention: The Workspace file (<file name>.wps) is not compatible between different

releases of the WPS tool. You must therefore import templates, workorders and

snapshots from the appropriate WPS tool release with the Import and Export...

command.

The stored file (<file name>.wps) must be accessible to the WPS.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, either select File > Open, or click the Open icon.

Result: A Select a workspace file to open window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Navigate to the folder storing the required workspace and Open the workspace.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

Result: The Open window appears with a progress bar. When completed, the current

workspace is set with the opened workspace.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Opening a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Saving a workspace

Purpose

You can save a workspace (<file name>.wps) in a number of ways, depending on whether

it is a new workspace, an open workspace or a workspace to be renamed or saved.

Attention: The Workspace file (<file name>.wps) is not compatible between different

releases of the WPS tool. You must therefore export templates, workorders and

snapshots to the other WPS tool release with the Import and Export... command.

The folder where the workspace file (<file name>.wps) is saved is accessible from the

WPS PC.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Depending on how you opened the workspace, three different saving procedures are

possible.

Result: A Select a file for saving the workspace window appears.

If the current workspace is Then...

A new workspace From the WPS main window, either select File

> Save, or click the Save icon. Go to Step 2

An open workspace to be renamed From the WPS main window, select File >

Save as. Go to Step 2

An open workspace From the WPS main window, either select File

> Save, or click the Save icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Navigate to the folder where you want to store the workspace.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Save.

Result: Save window with a progress bar appears.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Saving a workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

Purpose

This procedure describes how to configure settings such as defining parameters for data

sharing, workorder execution, import and export of network information, template tree

processing, and organizing MOIs in the network and dataset trees.

Procedure overview

This section provides information on the following procedures:

• “Steps to configure wizard settings” (p. 4-9)

• “Steps to configure automatic grouping of MOIs in the Network and Dataset tree”

(p. 4-10)

• “Steps to define import and export parameters” (p. 4-10)

Using the Change settings menu option and the WPS change settings window, the live

server connection parameters can be set and a shared workpsace can be used for data

exchange between the WPS and live server repository.

Steps to configure wizard settings

Perform the following steps to define the workorder creation procedures for the wizard

operations:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.

Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Wizard tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select any of the following values from the Create new workorder when opening

wizard drop-down:

• Ask - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS prompts you to

create a new workorder.

• Always - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS

automatically creates a new workorder for the wizard operations.

• Never - On selecting this value and launching a wizard operation, WPS does not

create a new workorder for the wizard operations.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps to configure automatic grouping of MOIs in the Network and Dataset tree

Perform the following steps to enable automatic grouping of the MOIs:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.

Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To enable automatic grouping of MOIs for the Network tree, perform the following steps:

• Click the Network tree tab.

• Select the Auto grouping activation check box.

• Specify the threshold value for automatic grouping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To enable automatic grouping of MOIs for the Dataset tree, perform the following steps:

• Click the Dataset tree tab.

• Select the Auto grouping activation check box.

• Specify the threshold value for automatic grouping.

Steps to define import and export parameters

Perform the following steps to specify import and export parameters:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.

Result: The WiPS Settings window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Export/Import tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To define the usage of separator in the CSV files for import and export operations, select

an appropriate value from the Separator for CSV files drop-down.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Configuring WPS settings for network operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing network snapshots

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing a snapshot in the

CM XML format through the Import and Export wizard.

Note: WPS supports import of snapshots in the .XML, .XCM, .ZIP and .GZ file

formats.

Steps to import a snapshot

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import snapshots option and click Next.

Result: The Import snapshot: mode selection window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select any of the following options:

• Replace initial snapshot and discard the existing workorders

Select this option to create a new snapshot view and remove the existing workorders

if any.

• Merge with planned network

Select this option to merge a network snapshot with the existing network.

After the import operation is completed, the WPS workspace includes the initial

snapshot, the previous workorders, and the newly added network objects. The base

network configuration is computed with all the workorders.

• Replace initial snapshot and keep existing workorders

Select this option to create the initial snapshot view with the existing workorders.

Rebasing a network with priority on workorders recomputes the current network

based on a new initial snapshot, but keeps the existing workorders.

• Resynchronize the planned configuration with new snapshot

Select this option to resynchronize a network with a new reference snapshot .

During the network resynchronization, a new workorder is created and the existing

workorders are removed.

• Delete with planned network

Select this option to delete a network.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-11

Note: The WPS allows modification of the restricted parameters, but generates an

error report. However, Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend the modification of the

standard and restricted parameters.

Figure 3-99, “Import snapshot: mode selection” (p. 3-138) shows an example for

selecting the mode for the snapshot import.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Next.

Result: The Import snapshot: file selection window appears.

• To import the snapshot from the local directory, click Browse local. Browse to the

location where the snapshot is stored, select the snapshot, and click Open.

• To import the snapshot from a live server repository, click Browse repository.

Result: The Select CM XML snapshots from repository window appears.

Figure 4-1 Import snapshot: mode selection

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Note: If the live server repository is not defined, click define repository and

specify the server name, server type, url, username, password and sub-network.

For more information on defining live server repository mechanism, see

“Configuring WPS settings for network operations” (p. 4-9).

Select the snapshot from the live server repository and click Open.

Figure 3-100, “Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)” (p. 3-139) shows

the window for importing snapshots from the local file system.

Figure 4-3, “Import snapshot: define repository” (p. 4-14) and Figure 4-4, “Import

snapshot: file selection (live server repository)” (p. 4-15) show the windows for

importing snapshots from the live server repository.

Figure 4-2 Import snapshot: file selection (local file system)

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-13

Figure 4-3 Import snapshot: define repository

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the sub-network to which you want to import the snapshot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Next.

Figure 4-4 Import snapshot: file selection (live server repository)

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-15

Result: The wizard window for selecting a subset of objects to import appears as

shown in Figure 3-104, “Select subset of objects to import” (p. 3-143).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Filter the top-level objects to import:

• To select a subset of top-level objects to import, click Edit filter. A window

displaying the list of root objects to import appears as shown in Figure 3-105,

“Top-Level objects analysis” (p. 3-144).

• To select a specific top-level object through the advanced filtering option, select the

object and click Edit advanced filter. A window displaying the subset of the selected

object appears as shown in Figure 4-7, “Select a specific subset of top-level objects”

(p. 4-18).

Figure 4-5 Select objects to import

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 4-6 Select a subset of top-level objects

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the objects to import and click Next.

If required, select the option to save the workspace.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 To start the import, click Start.

Result: The window indicating the completion of the import procedure appears as shown

in Figure 3-107, “Import snapshot: Completed” (p. 3-146).

If required, save the report in the XML format.

Figure 4-7 Select a specific subset of top-level objects

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 4-8 Import snapshot: completed

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing network snapshots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing tabular from Excel file

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to describe the procedure for importing the tabular format

values from the Excel file.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the File menu, select Import and export option.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Import tabular from Excel file option.

Result: The Import tabular from Excel file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder on your local file system and click

Open.

Result: The complete file path appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To start the import, click Start.

Result: The values of the Excel file are imported.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Importing tabular from Excel file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a sub-network

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a sub-network.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File→Set active sub-network...

Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Create.

Result: The Create sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter a name for the sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Creating a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting a sub-network as active

Purpose

This procedure describes how to set an existing sub-network as an active sub-network.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File→Set active sub-network...

Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Set as Active.

Result: The selected sub-network is set as an active sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Setting a sub-network as active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Renaming a sub-network

Purpose

This procedure describes how to rename an existing sub-network.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File→Set active sub-network...

Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Rename.

Result: The Rename sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Rename the sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Renaming a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing a sub-network

Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove an existing sub-network.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File→Set active sub-network...

Result: The Set active sub-network window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Remove.

Result: The sub-network is removed from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close.

Result: The Set active sub-networkwindow is closed.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Removing a sub-network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a snapshot

Purpose

This section describes the procedure for exporting a snapshot in the CM XML format

through the Import and Export wizard.

Note: The Export as CM XML command, available from the contextual menu for the

Network root in the WPS workspace, also allows exporting of snapshots to the local

repository.

Steps to export a snapshot

To export a snapshot, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Export snapshots option and click Next.

Result: The Export snapshot (local file system) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse to select a file.

Result: The Select a directory window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the directory path and type the file name for snapshot. Figure 3-79, “Export

snapshot (local file system)” (p. 3-112) illustrates the file name and directory path

specification.

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-25

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Save as ZIP archive as required

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Next.

Figure 4-9 Export snapshot (local file system)

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The window for filtering objects to export appears as shown in Figure 4-10,

“Export snapshot: Edit filter” (p. 4-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Filter the top-level objects to import:

• To select a subset of top-level objects to export, click Edit filter. A displaying the list

of root objects to export appears as shown in Figure 4-11, “Select a subset of top-level

objects” (p. 4-28).

• To select a specific top-level object through the advanced filtering option, select the

object, and click Edit advanced filter. A window displaying the subset of the selected

object appears as shown in Figure 4-12, “Select a specific subset of top-level objects”

(p. 4-29).

• To select parameterized filter to export subset to objects, click Edit parameterized

filter. A window displaying the list of root objects to export appears as shown in

Figure 4-13, “Select a parameterized filter” (p. 4-30).

Figure 4-10 Export snapshot: Edit filter

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-27

Figure 4-11 Select a subset of top-level objects

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Figure 4-12 Select a specific subset of top-level objects

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the objects to export and click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 To start the export, click Start.

Result: The progress and completion of the snapshot export is shown in Figure 3-83,

“Export snapshot: Completed” (p. 3-116).

Figure 4-13 Select a parameterized filter

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

If required, save the report in the XML format.

Note: If the sub-networks are defined in WPS, the sub-network name is appended to

the CM XML snapshot file name, for example <Snapshot_filename>-<subnetwork-

name>.xcm. If no sub-networks are defined in WPS, the default sub-network name is

appended to the file name, for example <Snapshot_filename>-default.xcm.

Figure 4-14 Export snapshot: Completed

General WPS operating procedures

Workspace management

Exporting a snapshot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data sharing management

Overview

Purpose

The WPS data sharing environment enables several team members to work on common

CM data simultaneously. For more information about this functionality, see the “WPS

data sharing” (p. 2-47) chapter.

Contents

Setting or changing connection parameters 4-33

Creating shared workspace 4-36

Opening shared workspace 4-37

Removing shared workspace 4-38

Synchronizing workspace 4-39

Refreshing resource synchronization status 4-40

Publishing resource 4-41

Retrieving resource 4-42

Removing shared resource 4-43

Making a local copy 4-44

Delivering workorder for activation 4-45

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Setting or changing connection parameters

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to set or change connection parameters to access a

shared workspace on the live server repository.

Before you begin

Authentication parameters are required to log into a shared data repository. Ensure that

the authentication information required for defining connection parameters is available.

Steps to define connection parameters for data exchange

Perform the following steps to define parameters for the live server repository

connections:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File>Change settings.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-33

Result: The WPS change settings window appears as shown in Figure 4-15, “WPS

settings window” (p. 4-34).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To define connection parameters for data sharing, enter appropriate values in the host,

username, and password fields.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To connect to the live server repository, click Connect.

Result: The connection to the live server is established.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To add a new connection or another live server repository details, click the Transfer tab

on the WiPS Settings window, and then perform the following steps:

a. Click New connection.

Figure 4-15 WPS settings window

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Add New Connection window appears.

b. Enter the server name.

c. Select the server type.

d. Enter the IP address of the server or host name in the host1 field.

e. Enter the user name.

f. Click OK.

Result: The Transfer Connection Parameters window appears.

g. Enter the password and click Connect.

Result: The connection to the new live server is established.

Note: You can also define the connection parameters for data exchange with the live

server repository during the import of snapshots or workorders into WPS. If the live

server repository is already configured, the import wizard displays the live server

details, from which the snapshots and workorders can be imported. If the live server

details are not configured or if a new connection must be added, click define

repository and then specify the connection parameter details such as server name,

server type, host IP address, username, and password.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To modify the connection parameters, click the Transfer tab and then perform the

following steps:

a. Ensure that the connection to modify is selected.

b. Click Edit.

Result: The Edit Connection window appears.

c. Modify the parameters as required.

d. Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To remove a connection, perform the following steps:

a. On the Transfer tab, ensure that the connection to delete is selected.

b. Click Remove.

Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm the deletion appears.

c. Click Yes.

Result: The connection to the live server is removed.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Setting or changing connection parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-35

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating shared workspace

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a shared workspace on the repository. It publishes

the currently loaded workspace in the application.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Sharing →Create shared workspace from the main menu.

Result: The Create shared Workspace window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the Workspace name field with the name of the shared workspace to be created.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Create.

Result: The Create shared workspace <filename> window with a progress bar

appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save report... to save an HTML log file containing all the modifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Creating shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Opening shared workspace

Purpose

This procedure describes how to retrieve locally all the resources of a shared workspace

defined in the repository. The procedure outputs and saves an HTML log file, to track the

messages generated during the retrieval function. See the Data sharing chapter for more

details.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the main menu, click Sharing > Open shared workspace.

Result: The Open shared workspace window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the workspace to be opened.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes to proceed.

Result: The Open shared workspace '<filename>' window with a progress bar

appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Opening shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-37

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing shared workspace

Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove a shared workspace from the repository. One or

several workspaces can be removed by this operation.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the main menu, click Sharing > Delete shared workspace.

Result: The Delete shared workspaces window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select in the list the workspaces to remove.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes to proceed.

Result: A window with a progress bar appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Removing shared workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronizing workspace

Purpose

This procedure describes how to synchronize the local workspace with the repository one.

To make the modifications visible by the other team members the current workspace must

be published in the repository. This action updates the version on the server, see Data

sharing for more information.

The synchronization operation publishes and retrieves the data required to synchronize all

the non-conflicting resources. For information on conflict resolution, see “Refresh

resource synchronization status” (p. 3-39).

Steps to synchronize shared workspace

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the main menu, click Sharing > Synchronize shared workspace or click the

Synchronize shared workspace icon.

Result: A prompt asking you to confirm the synchronization operation appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Confirm by clicking Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Synchronizing workspace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-39

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing resource synchronization status

Purpose

This procedure describes how to refresh the resource synchronization status. This

operation updates the local view of the resource with the latest view from the server. This

operation is required to achieve the resource retrieval and the shared workspace

synchronization actions.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Sharing → Refresh resource synchronization status, from the main menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Refreshing resource synchronization status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Publishing resource

Purpose

This procedure describes how to declare a new resource in the repository or a new version

of an existing one. This action makes the resource available for other team members. The

operation is disabled when a conflict on the resource is detected.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the main menu, click Sharing > Publish resource.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Yes.

Result: The Publish '<resourceName>' window with a progress bar appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To save the HTML log file containing all the modifications, click Save report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Publishing resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-41

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Retrieving resource

This procedure describes how to update the local resource with the latest version of a

shared resource available in the repository. To discard any conflicts between resource

version, make sure to refresh the resource synchronization status.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the resource to retrieve from the “Workorders tab” (p. 3-50).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Sharing > Retrieve resource, from the main menu.

Result: A Retrieve '<resourceName>' window with a progress bar opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Save report... to save locally a html log file containing all the modifications that

have been done step by step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Retrieving resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing shared resource

Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove a shared resource from the repository.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select a resource from the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click on the selected resource.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click delete.

Result: The selected resource appears in gray color in the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Right-click on the selected resource.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Publish (delete resource on repository).

Result: A Publish '<resourceName>' window appears and the selected resource will

be removed from the repository.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Save report... to save locally an HTML log file containing all the modifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Removing shared resource

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-43

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Making a local copy

Purpose

This procedure describes how to save the shared workspace locally to work offline. All

the resources of the workspace will be managed as local resources. The created file is

saved at .../wips/user/sharing/WorkspaceName/export_from_server_Config.xcm.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Open a shared workspace from the repository.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the main menu, click Sharing > Make local copy.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Making a local copy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delivering workorder for activation

Purpose

This procedure describes how to publish a workorder to the WMS.

Steps to deliver workorder for activation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Workorders tab, select the workorder.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the main menu, click Workorders > Export workorder> on live server

repository.

Result: The Export workorder '<workorderName>' (live server repository)

window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify the name of the workorder to be delivered.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Data sharing management

Delivering workorder for activation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-45

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Templates management

Overview

Purpose

A template is a particular kind of object dedicated to the management of values likely to

be shared among several objects. It is used during the instantiation of Managed Objects to

minimize the number of parameters to be manually initialized by the user. See the

“Templates” (p. 3-19) chapter.

Templates are used when:

• creating a network object

• running a wizard

• comparing network objects

Templates files extension is <filename>.xtpl.

Contents

Setting the default source 4-47

Importing templates 4-48

Creating a template 4-50

Creating template from a network/dataset object 4-51

Adding a child to a template instance 4-52

Removing a template instance 4-53

Duplicating a template 4-54

Migrating a template 4-55

Distilling a template 4-56

Comparing templates 4-57

Updating template 4-58

Setting template as default 4-59

Unsetting a template as default 4-60

Renaming a template 4-61

Deleting a template 4-62

Exporting templates 4-63

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Setting the default source

Purpose

When a template is imported, created, or updated, a source is associated with each

template instance and with each template attribute. This procedure describes how to set

the default source.

Steps to set the default source

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates > Set current source....

Result: The Set current source window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure that the appropriate source is selected from the drop down menu and then click

Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Setting the default source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-47

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing templates

Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a CM XML template (<file name>.xtpl). To

know more about CM XML, see CM XML Format Description,

(UMT/OMC/DD/007615). Once you have imported the templates, Alcatel-Lucent

recommends that you compare the existing network objects with the imported templates

(See “Comparing a network object with a template” (p. 4-134)).

The templates file (<file name>.xtpl) to import must be accessible to the WPS.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.

Result: The Templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the WPS main window, select File > Import and Export....

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Import templates, then click Next >.

Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Browse....

Result: The Select a CM XML templates file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Navigate and select the template to import, and then click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Next > in the Import templates (Local file system) window.

Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window opens with a progress

bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If all operations have to be analyzed and tracked, click Show report... and then click

Save Report.... Click Start to import.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Attention: The unsupported model version or unrecognized object type discards the

associated template instance. Check the Template file analysis report for such

instances.

Result: The Import templates (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If all operations have to be tracked, click Save Report... in the appropriate folder. Click

Close.

Result: The new template appears in the templates tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Importing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-49

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a template

Overview

This procedure describes how to create a new template.

Steps to create a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, either select Templates >Create template... or in the

Templates tab, select the template subtree object, and then click Create template...

from the contextual menu.

Result: A Create a new template <version/object> window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the Template name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Object type and then click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Creating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating template from a network/dataset object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a template after defining a network or dataset

object (MOI). The template inherits its model name and version from those of the root

MOI.

The root MOI is part of the current network or dataset.

Steps to create a template from a network or dataset object

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network or Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Network or Datasets tab, select the element to be used as root, to create the

template.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Create template....

Result: The Create template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 When the root MOI has child objects, the created template can be a unitary or sub-tree

template.

If the template is... Then...

A sub-tree template Select the Capture subtree box.

A unitary template Clear the Capture subtree box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Specify the Template name and then click OK.

Result: The new template appears in the Templates tree under the Templates tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Creating template from a network/dataset object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-51

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding a child to a template instance

Purpose

This procedure describes how to add a child to a template instance.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab (see “Templates tab” (p. 3-55)).

Result: The Templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the template where the child will be added.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the template editor panel, fill in the Template creation: create field with the

proper <child type>. If applicable, fill in the rdnId and use template fields. Then click

Create.

Result: The child appears in the templates tree window.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Adding a child to a template instance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing a template instance

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a template instance.

At least one child must be defined in the template instance.

Steps to remove a template instance

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the template instance to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.

Result: A Confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: The child template instance is removed from the templates tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Removing a template instance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-53

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate a template instance. The template inherits its

model name and version from those of the duplicated template.

Steps to duplicate a template instance

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the template.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Duplicate

template....

Result: The Duplicate template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the duplicated template has child instances, the copy of the template created during the

duplicate operation can be a unitary or sub-tree template.

If the template is... Required action

A sub-tree template Select the Capture subtree check box.

A unitary template Clear the Capture subtree check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Specify a name for the template in the Template name field, and then click OK.

Result: The new template appears in the templates tree under the Templates tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Duplicating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Migrating a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to migrate a template.

Steps to migrate a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the templates.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Migrate....

Result: The Migrate templates window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the Target version, and then click Apply.

Result: The Migrate templates from 'source version' to 'target version' window

appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close

Result: The new template appears in the templates tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Migrating a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-55

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Distilling a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to distill templates.

Note: To minimize template file size, the template attribute set to a default object

model value can be discarded.

Steps to distill a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the templates to be distilled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Distill....

Result: The Distill templates window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the Purge empty templates and then click Yes.

Result: The Distill templates window opens with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Distilling a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing templates

This procedure describes how to compare two different templates and propagate attribute

value to each other.

The two templates to compare must have different attribute values.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab. (See “Templates tab” (p. 3-55)).

Result: The Templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Templates tree, select the first template to be compared and then the second one

(Ctrl+ click).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Compare... the template.

Result: The Compare 'template1' with 'template2' window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the appropriate arrow to propagate attribute value from one template to the other.

Repeat it for other attributes to be updated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Comparing templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-57

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to update template.

Steps to update a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the templates to be updated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Template panel, select the attributes to update.

To... Steps

Set the attribute value Specify the value and click Set.

Reset the attribute value Click Unset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Repeat the step for each attribute.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Updating template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting template as default

Purpose

This procedure describes how to set a template as a default.

Steps to set a template as default

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the template to set as default.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Set template as

default.

Result: The selected template in the templates tree is updated with the (default) word

at the end.

To remove the default setting, select the template and click Do not use template as

default from the contextual menu or the Templates menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Setting template as default

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-59

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unsetting a template as default

Purpose

This procedure describes how to unset a template as default.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab (see “Templates tab” (p. 3-55)).

Result: The Templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the template that is set as default.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Do not use

template as default (see Templates menu in the main window).

Result: The string (default) is removed from the template name.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Unsetting a template as default

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Renaming a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to rename a template.

Steps to rename a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Templates tree, select the template to be renamed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, select Rename....

Result: The Rename template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify the new name and then click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Renaming a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-61

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a template.

Attention: Deleting the children of a sub-tree template changes the sub-tree template

to a unitary template.

Steps to delete a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Templates tab.

Result: The templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Templates tree, select the template to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete the template.

Result: A Confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: The template is removed from Templates tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Deleting a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-62 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting templates

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export templates to a storage directory.

For exporting all the templates, other alternatives exist:

• Using Export all templates... from Templates root tree contextual menu.

• Using File→Import and Export... from the WPS main window.

The directory storing the templates must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Templates tab.

Result: The Templates tree appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the templates tree, select the templates to export.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Export template....

Result: The Select template sources window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the templates sources to be exported, and then click OK.

Result: The Select an output file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select a folder, enter template name, and then click Save.

Result: The Export Templates as CM XML window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Start.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 When completed, if the operation must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Templates management

Exporting templates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-63

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

External interfaces

Overview

Purpose

The WPS tool can manage XML interfaces.

To know more about CM XML files, see “WPS external interfaces” (p. 2-43) section.

Configuration files (XML) must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.

Contents

Importing a configuration file 4-65

Exporting a configuration file 4-67

Exporting table 4-69

General WPS operating procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-64 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Importing a configuration file

Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a configuration file and replace the initial

snapshot with new network snapshot.

When the initial snapshot is replaced by the new snapshot, all workorders associated with

the initial snapshot are discarded from the current workspace.

Customer type parameters

You can modify only the parameters that are standard or restricted for a specific network.

WPS ignores the manufacturer parameters during the import, but generates an error report

after the import is completed.

Attention: Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend the modification of restricted

parameters.

Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks

• Open any <filename>.xcm with an XML editor and note the name of the Main Server.

For example, Cluster id="UMAINSERV1". Ensure that the name of the Main Server

displayed in WPS is the same as the Main Server mentioned in the CM XML file.

• From the WPS main window, select the Network tab and check if the Cluster/Name

of the Main Server is the same as the Cluster id in the <file name>.xcm file.

Procedure

To import the snapshot, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, perform any of the following actions:

• From the WPS main window, select File → Import and Export....

• From the Workorders tab, select the Workspace object, and then select Import and

Export... from the contextual menu.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Import snapshots, and then click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Replace initial snapshot and discard existing workorders, and then click Next.

General WPS operating procedures

External interfaces

Importing a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-65

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the snapshot to import, either from the local directory or a live server repository:

• Click Browse local to navigate to the local directory and select the snapshot.

• Click Browse repository to navigate to the live repository and select the snapshot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select a sub-network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To select a subset of top-level objects, click Edit filter.

To select a specific subset of a top-level object, click Edit advanced filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the objects to import and click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select Yes or No as appropriate, and then click Start.

Result: The Import snapshots - Replace initial snapshot and discard existing

workorders window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Save Report... to save the report and then click Close.

Result: The new Initial snapshot: <filename>.xcm appears in the Workspace tree

and the old workorders are replaced.

General WPS operating procedures

External interfaces

Importing a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-66 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a configuration file

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export a configuration file (network snapshot) in the

XML format.

Note: The format of the exported <file name>.xcm file is similar to the format used

for imports.

Procedure

Perform the following steps to export the configuration file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, perform any of the following actions:

• Select File > Import and Export....

• From the Workorders tab, select the Workspace object, and then select Import and

Export... from the contextual menu.

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

Note: You can also use the Export as CM XML contextual menu command, which is

available on selecting the network root in the Workspace tab, to export a network

snapshot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Export snapshot, and then click Next .

Result: The Export snapshot (Local file system) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse....

Result: The Select a directory window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the appropriate local repository, and then click Save.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter the file name for the snapshot to be exported.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select Save as ZIP archive as required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Next.

General WPS operating procedures

External interfaces

Exporting a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-67

Result: The wizard window for filtering network objects appears.

If required, perform the following steps:

• To select a subset of top-level objects to export, click Edit filter and select the

objects.

• To select a specific subset of a top-level object, click Edit advanced filter and select

the object.

• To select parameterized filter to export subset to objects, click Edit parameterized

filter and select the object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Start.

Result: The Export snapshot (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.

If ... Then...

The selected file is new A Export snapshot (Local file system)

windows appears with a progress bar.

The selected file already exists The File already exists warning window

appears.

Click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 After the snapshot is exported successfully, click Save Report... to save the report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

External interfaces

Exporting a configuration file

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-68 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting table

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the tabular data in the HTML or Excel format.

This procedure applies to the tabular data displayed on clicking the WPS Instance

Browser tabs such as Network, Workorders, Templates, Datasets or Checks.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click any tab, for example Network, Workorders or

Templates, in the WPS Instance Browser.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click the table display panel, and select Export table....

Result: The Select an output file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the file name, choose the file type, and click Save.

General WPS operating procedures

External interfaces

Exporting table

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-69

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Workorder management

Overview

Purpose

A workorder defines the offline configuration changes between the initial configuration to

the current one. After the workorder is exported, it is used online by the network manager

to update the network.

Alcatel-Lucent recommends splitting a major network transition plan into as many

workorders as possible within WPS. The WPS tool does not support the undo function.

To recover a previous working workspace state, delete the last workorder.

To know more about workorder, see the “Workorders” (p. 3-15) chapter.

Workorder extension file is <filename>.xwo.

Workorder files (<filename>.xwo) must be accessible to the WPS tool PC.

Contents

Importing workorders 4-71

Importing reference workorders 4-72

Creating a workorder 4-75

Modifying a workorder 4-76

Merging workorders 4-78

Finalizing workorders 4-79

Exporting a single workorder 4-81

Exporting multiple workorders 4-82

Managing reference workorders 4-84

Deleting a workorder 4-88

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-70 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Importing workorders

Purpose

This procedure describes how to import workorders in XML format. While importing

workorders, you can keep the existing workorders.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File > Import and Export....

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Import workorders, select the source, and then click Next.

Result:

• If Local file system is selected, the Import workorders (Local file system)

window appears.

Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder, select the workorder<file

name>.xwo, and click Open.

• If Live server repository is selected, the Import workorders (Live server

repository) window appears.

Select the workorder to import, from the Live server repository.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required, save the workspace, and then click Start.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 When completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report.... .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

Result: The imported workorders are listed in the Workorders tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Importing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-71

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing reference workorders

Purpose

This procedure describes how to import a reference workorder.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select File ->Import and Export....

Result: The Import and Export Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Import reference workorder as shown in the following figure:

Figure 4-16 Import reference workorder

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-72 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Import workorders (Local file system) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse... to navigate to the appropriate folder on your local file system and click

Open.

Result: The complete file path appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Next >.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Save the current workspace if required and then click Start.

Result: The Import workorders (Local file system) window appears with a progress

bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 When the import is completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report....

Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-73

Result: The imported reference workorder appears in the Repository tree on the

Workorders tab as shown in the following figure:

Figure 4-17 Reference Workorder

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Importing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-74 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a workorder

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a workorder.

From the contextual menu, the command Insert a new workorder before can be used

for creating a new workorder above the selected one.

Steps to create a workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Workorders root from the tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, click Create new

workorder....

Result: A workorder indicated as new workorder (current) is added at the end of the

Workorders sub-tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify the required details in the Name, Originator, External reference, External

Description, and Description fields, and then click Apply.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Creating a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-75

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a workorder

Purpose

This procedure describes how to modify (inhibit/disinhibit) attribute value changes that

belong to a workorder. This procedure includes synchronization of the current network

with the current workorders. Nevertheless, the operator can modify a workorder without

impacting the current network.

The workorder to modify must be part of the workspace.

Steps to modify a workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the workorder to modify from the Workorders tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, click Set workorder as

current.

Result: The Setting current workorder window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If required, change the attribute values for the network elements using the operational

procedures or from the Object Editor: Edition panel. After the modifications, go to the

Workorders tab and select the current workorder.

Result: The current Workorder is updated with the attribute value changes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the Change panel, select the network object changes to modify. If needed, from the

Inhibit change panel, select the attribute changes to modify.

Use Caps+click or Ctrl+click for multiple objects or attributes selection.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Modifying a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-76 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders menu, inhibit or disinhibit

changes using the following commands:

• Inhibit network change

• Disinhibit network change

• Inhibit changes for subtree

• Disinhibit changes for subtree

• Clear inhibition tags

Result: The Workorders tree root appears in red color followed by the word

(misaligned).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Once you performed all the modifications needed, click Recompute planning view from

the Workorders menu.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Yes.

Result: The Recompute planning view window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Check the current network. Repeat the steps until the workorder is modified.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Modifying a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-77

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Merging workorders

This procedure describes how to merge consecutive workorders into a new one.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See “Workorders tab”

(p. 3-50)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select several consecutive Workorders in the tree by using the Shift/Ctrl key.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the

main window), select Merge workorders....

Result: A confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select an option and then click Run.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Merging workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-78 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Finalizing workorders

This procedure describes how to finalize a workorder before activating the change to the

live network.

Attention: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all workorders are merged in one

workorder prior to exporting them onto live network elements. Once you have

exported a simple workorder, the exported workorder might contain inconsistent (or

unset) attribute values for a live network element.

The workorders must be in the workspace.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See “Workorders tab”

(p. 3-50)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Workorders tree root.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the

main window), select Purge inhibited changes.

Result: A confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the main window) click

Recompute planning view.

Result: A confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Yes.

Result: The Recompute network window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the

main window), select Merge network changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Finalizing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-79

Result: The Merge network changes window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the appropriate saving option, and then click Run.

Result: A Merge network changes window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

Result: All the workorders including the current one are replaced by the merged

workorder.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Finalizing workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-80 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a single workorder

This procedure describes how to export a workorder.

Attention: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using this procedure. When exporting a single

workorder in a CM XML format, the WPS application creates a <file

name>_reverse.xwo workorder file. If the activation of the workorder leads to a

problem in the live network, the reverse workorder allows to set the network back to

its initial state

NOTICE

Inconsistent (or unset) attribute value(s)

Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all workorders are merged in one workorder prior to

exporting them onto live network elements. Once you have exported a simple workorder,

the exported workorder might contain inconsistent (or unset) attribute values for a live

network element.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab (See “Workorders tab”

(p. 3-50)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Workorder to export from the Workorders sub-tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or the Workorders menu (See Workorders menu in the

main window), select Export workorder....

Result: The Select a file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Navigate to the appropriate folder where the workorder will be stored (.xwo), enter the

File name and then click Save.

Result: An Export workorder... window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 When completed, if all operations must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Exporting a single workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-81

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting multiple workorders

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export workorders in the CM XML format as an xwo

file.

Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you export only a single workorder at a time.

When exporting a single workorder, the WPS application generates a reverse

workorder file. When the activation of a workorder leads to a configuration error in

the live network, you can use the reverse workorder to troubleshoot, or to set the

network back to its initial state.

Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks:

• WPS checks are run and errors, if any, are resolved.

• If the workorder must be exported to a live server repository, ensure that all relevant

workorders are merged into single workorder.

Steps to export multiple workorders

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the workorder from the Workorders sub-tree and select any of the following

options from the contextual menu:

Select any of the following options:

• Click Export all workorders...>on local file system

Result: The Select an output directory window appears.

• Click Export all workorders...>on live server repository

Result: The Export workorders (live server repository) window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Specify the output directory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the name of the workorder in the Filename dialog box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Exporting multiple workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-82 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The workorders from WPS are exported as single CM XML (xwo format) file

to the directories specified during the export operation.

Note: If the sub-networks are defined in WPS, the sub-network name is appended to

the workorder file name, for example, <workorder_filename>-<subnetwork-name>.

xwo. If there are no sub-networks defined in WPS, the default sub-network name is

appended to the workorder file name, for example, <workorder_filename>-default.

xwo.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Exporting multiple workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-83

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing reference workorders

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create, generate, and export reference workorders.

Workorder cloning operations

On creating a reference workorder, WPS automatically generates the mask associated

with the reference workorder. This mask is used to create the bulk input file on running

workorder cloning mask file operation. On clicking the node tree, the content of the bulk

mask appears in the right panel.

Using Import and Export wizard to import reference workorder

For information on importing a reference workorder through the Import and Export

wizard, see “Importing reference workorders” (p. 3-133).

Procedure overview

This section describes how to perform following procedures:

• Creating a reference workorder

• Exporting a reference workorder

• Generating workorders

• Applying changes to network

• Renaming a reference workorder

• Deleting a reference workorder

Steps to create a reference workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Workorder, which you want to set as a reference.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders main menu, click Set as a

reference workorder.

Result: A pop-up window asking you to confirm the folder name appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the folder name and click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-84 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The selected workorder appears under the Repository folder of the

Workorder tab.

Steps to export reference workorder files

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To export the reference files, either from the contextual menu or from the Workorders->

Repository menu, select reference workorder folder.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To export only the bulk mask file, right-click on the mask file or the reference workorder

folder, and select Create workorder cloning mask file from the contextual menu.

Result: The Select an output file window that allows you to navigate to your local

file system appears.

a. Specify a name for the file.

b. Click Save.

The output is saved in the .xls format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To export the workorder, right-click on the reference workorder and select Export

workorder.

Result: The Select an output file window that allows you to navigate to your local

file system appears.

a. Select the directory to export the workorder.

b. Specify the file name for the workorder.

Result: The workorder is saved as a CM XML file in the specified location.

Note: The reference workorder can be exported only to the local file system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To export both mask file and reference workorder, right-click on the reference workorder

folder and select Export reference files from the contextual menu.

Result: The reference files are exported to your local file system.

The reference workorder is exported as CM XML file and the bulk mask is exported

as .xls file.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-85

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The bulk input file contains the following columns:

• Type

• Object

• Method

• Attribute

• Reference value

• Value

Note: All columns must be filled with appropriate values before importing a bulk file

into WPS.

Steps to generate workorders

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the reference workorder or the reference workorder folder, and select

Generate workorder(s) from the contextual menu.

Result: The Import bulk file and generate workorders window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the bulk file in the .xls format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next

Result: The bulk file content is imported into WPS and a session is created under the

reference workorder folder in the Workorders tab.

Steps to apply changes to network

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the session created after importing the workorders mask file and select

Apply session to network or right-click on the workorder generated after importing the

bulk file, and select Apply workorder(s) to network.

Result: A report indicating the warnings and errors are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify the report and click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-86 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The changes stored in the workorder are applied to the network.

Steps to rename a reference workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To rename the workorder, select the workorder and click Rename either from the

contextual menu or from the Workorders-> Repository menu.

Result: A pop-up window to rename the folder appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the name of the workorder you want to rename.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

Steps to delete a reference workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To delete the reference workorder, select the workorder and click Delete either from the

contextual menu or from the Workorders-> Repository menu.

Result: A pop-up window asking you to confirm deletion appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Yes to delete the workorder.

Result: The workorder is deleted from the workorders tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Managing reference workorders

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-87

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a workorder

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a workorder.

Attention: Deleting a workorder affects the workorder commands.

Steps to delete a workorder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Workorders tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Workorders tree, select the workorder to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.

Result: A Confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

Result: The workorder is removed from Workorders tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Workorder management

Deleting a workorder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-88 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Datasets management

Overview

Purpose

Instead of performing the same modification on several similar objects, Datasets can be

defined as lists of MOI that are going to be modified in the same way at the same time.

The WPS tool provides the opportunity to create lists of objects, which can be

manipulated together all at one go, once they have been grouped in a Dataset.

To know more about Datasets, see the “Datasets” (p. 3-29) chapter.

Contents

Creating a new dataset from MOIs 4-90

Creating a new dataset from a current one 4-91

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information 4-92

Adding MOIs from the network tree 4-94

Adding MOI(s) by conversion 4-95

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset 4-96

Removing MOIs from a Dataset 4-97

Exporting a dataset 4-98

Deleting a Dataset 4-99

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-89

Creating a new dataset from MOIs

Purpose

This procedure creates a Dataset from one or several MOIs.

Before you begin

Ensure that at least one MOI exists in the current workspace.

Steps to create a new dataset from MOIs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the network objects to be part of the dataset from the Network tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Add to Dataset > new

Dataset....

Result: A Create dataset window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the Dataset name field and then click OK.

Result: The dataset appears with the selected MOIs in the Datasets tree of the

Datasets tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Creating a new dataset from MOIs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-90 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a new dataset from a current one

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a Dataset from an existing Dataset by converting

it according to a predefined set of rules.

The dataset to be converted must be defined in the current workspace.

Steps a new dataset from the current one

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the dataset object to be converted from the Datasets tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Dataset conversion panel, select Input type, Navigators, Output type and

Output dataset, and then click Apply .

Result: The Convert... window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Close

Result: The dataset is updated in the Datasets tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Creating a new dataset from a current one

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-91

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a dataset for hardware inventory information.

Hardware inventory information in WPS

You can import the hardware inventory information into WPS from the WMS live server.

The hardware inventory information contains the read-only attributes, the modification of

which is restricted in WPS.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the hardware inventory information is imported into WPS

successfully.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Network tree, select the hardware objects for which you want to create a

dataset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select Create inventory

dataset.

Result: The Create inventory dataset window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the dataset name, and then click OK.

Result: The Add nodes to inventory dataset 'Dataset name' window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the report, click Save Report....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-92 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The dataset appears with the selected objects in the Datasets tree of the

Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To group the dataset nodes automatically, right-click and select Group by Type from the

contextual menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 To export dataset nodes as CM XML, select Export as CM XML from either the contextual

menu or the Datasets menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 To export dataset nodes in the CSV format, select Export as CSV from either the

contextual menu or the Datasets menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Creating a dataset for hardware inventory information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-93

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding MOIs from the network tree

Purpose

This procedure describes how to add one or several MOIs to a Dataset.

Before you begin

Ensure that the Dataset and the MOIs are defined in the current workspace.

Steps to add MOIs from the network tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Network tree, select the network objects to be added to the dataset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Add to Dataset >

dataset name.

Result: The MOIs appear under the dataset sub-tree under the Datasets tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Adding MOIs from the network tree

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-94 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Adding MOI(s) by conversion

Purpose

This procedure describes how to add MOIs to a Dataset from an existing Dataset by

converting it according to a predefined set of rules.

The dataset to be converted is defined in the current workspace.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab. (See “Datasets tab” (p. 3-58)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the dataset object to be converted from the Datasets tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Dataset conversion panel (See “Dataset conversion panel” (p. 3-86)), select

Input type, Navigators, Output type, Output dataset, and then click Apply.

While converting a New... dataset file, fill in the Dataset name in the Dataset creation

window prior to applying the conversion.

Result: A Converting... window with a progress bar appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 When completed, if the procedure must be tracked, click Save Report.... Click Close.

Result: The new MOI appears in the Datasets tree under the appended dataset.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Adding MOI(s) by conversion

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-95

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset

Purpose

This procedure removes all the objects included in a Dataset from the current Network.

Steps to remove objects from the network

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Datasets tree, select the dataset object that contains the objects to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select the Remove all

objects from network command.

Result: A Confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: All the objects are removed from the Dataset andNetwork.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Removing objects from the network using a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-96 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Removing MOIs from a Dataset

Purpose

This procedure describes how to remove one or several MOIs from a Dataset.

Steps to remove MOIs from a dataset

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Datasets tree, select the objects to be removed from the dataset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, click Remove from

Dataset.

Result: A Confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: The selected objects are removed from the dataset sub-tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Removing MOIs from a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-97

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a dataset

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export a dataset in the CM XML format. The exported

dataset in the CM XML can later be imported into WPS as a snapshot.

Before you begin

The dataset to export must be available and defined in the current workspace.

Procedure

To export a dataset, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the dataset object to export from the Datasets tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Datasets menu, select Export as CM XML.

• To export only the dataset instance, select Dataset instances only...

• To export the dataset instances with the subtrees, select Dataset instances with their

subtrees....

Result: The Select an output file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the file name and click Save.

Result: A window with a progress bar to indicate the status of the export procedure

appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save Report... to save the report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Exporting a dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-98 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a Dataset

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a Dataset.

Before you begin

Ensure that the Dataset to delete is available in the current Workspace.

Steps to delete a dataset

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Datasets tree, select the dataset to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, click Delete.

Result: A Confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: The selected dataset is removed from the Datasets tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Datasets management

Deleting a Dataset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-99

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Checks management

Overview

Purpose

The WPS tool allows running checks on network objects or datasets to ensure consistency

in the current network configuration data.

The WPS provides several sets of checks, which can be launched together or separately,

on the MOIs from the Network or the Datasets tab. The subsets of checks can be

customized and run as Check profiles on the selected MOIs.

Alcatel-Lucent recommends the following for WPS checks:

• Run checks before exporting the workorders to the live server repository for

activation.

• Exercise caution while modifying or resolving check errors with the AutoFix option.

Contents

Creating a check profile 4-101

Updating a check profile 4-102

Copying a check profile 4-103

Copying check profiles between WPS applications 4-104

Running checks on MOIs 4-105

Running checks on dataset objects 4-106

Re-running a check session 4-107

Running checks on several object instances 4-108

Deleting a check session 4-109

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-100 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Creating a check profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a check profile to run checks.

Steps to create a check profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Checks menu, select Create check profile.

Result: A Create profile window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Specify the check profile name in the Profile name field, and then click OK.

Result: The check profile appears in the Check profiles tree of the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To enable or disable checks, check or uncheck the Enable check box respectively.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To allow automatic resolution of check errors for a specific check entry, select the Autofix

check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click

on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Creating a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-101

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating a check profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to update an existing check profile.

Steps to update a check profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Check profiles tree, select the profile to update.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To enable or disable checks, check or uncheck the Enable check box respectively.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To allow automatic resolution of check errors for a specific check entry, select the Autofix

check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click

on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Updating a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-102 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying a check profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a check profile from an existing profile.

Steps to copy a check profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Check profiles tree, select the profile to be copied.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Duplicate... either from the Checks menu or from the contextual menu.

Result: A Duplicate check profile window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify a new name for the profile and then click OK.

Result: The check profile appears in the Check profiles tree of the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, modify the check profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To save the check profiles, select Save all profiles from the Checks menu, or right-click

on the check profile and select Save all profiles from the contextual menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Copying a check profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-103

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying check profiles between WPS applications

Purpose

This procedure describes how to copy check profiles between different WPS applications.

Before you begin

Perform the following checks:

• The WPS application instance containing the check profile to copy is active and

running.

• The WPS instance to which the check profile must be copied is not running.

Steps to copy check profiles between WPS applications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Explorer window, navigate to the directory where the originating WPS

application is installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Open the <user-data-dir>/<WPS-version>/data/user/checkProfiles folder and copy the

check profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Explorer window, navigate to the directory where the other WPS application

instance is installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Open the <user-data-dir>/<WPS-version>/data/user/checkProfiles folder and paste the

copied check profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Start the WPS application instance, to which the check profile is copied.

Result: The WPS application loads the copied check profile and displays it in the

Check profiles tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Copying check profiles between WPS applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-104 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on MOIs

Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on one or several MOIs in the Network.

On selecting the network root, the checks available for a network are displayed.

Before you begin

Ensure that the network on which the checks to be run is defined and the MOIs are

available in current WPS workspace.

Steps to run checks on MOIs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the elements to check.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu, or from the Checks menu, or from the tool bar, select

Run checks....

Result: The Checks window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the appropriate check profile. Select the Enabled check boxes for the

corresponding check entries that you want to run. To allow automatic resolution, select

the AutoFix check box.

Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends you to exercise caution while performing this

procedure, as there is no undo option available for parameter modifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result: A Checking selected objects ... window with a progress bar appears. The

check session appears in the Checks tab, under the Checks sessions sub-tree with the

date and time.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To save the report, click Save Report....

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Running checks on MOIs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-105

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on dataset objects

Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on one or several MOIs from the Dataset.

Steps to run checks on the dataset objects

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the datasets tree, select the elements to check.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Checks menu, or from the tool bar, select

Run checks....

Result: The Checks window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the appropriate profile and select the Enabled check box corresponding to the

check entries. To enable automatic resolution, select the AutoFix check box.

Alcatel-Lucent recommends that exercising caution while using the AutoFix option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result: The Checking selected objects window with a progress bar appears. The

check session appears in the Checks tab, under the Checks sessions sub-tree with the

date and time.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To save the report, click Save Report.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Running checks on dataset objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-106 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-running a check session

Purpose

This procedure describes how to re-run a check session.

Before you begin

Ensure that the check session to re-run is available in the WPS workspace.

Steps to re-run a check session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Check sessions sub-tree, select the Check session to re-run.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Checks menu, or from the Check session

panel, select Re-run check session.

Result: The Re-run check session window displaying the new check errors, if any,

appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To save the report, click Save Report.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Re-running a check session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-107

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running checks on several object instances

Purpose

This procedure describes how to run checks on several object instances for a common

error or warning, and group such instances in a Dataset.

For information on modifying the dataset attributes, see the following procedures:

• “Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab” (p. 4-140)

• “Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class” (p. 4-143)

Steps to run checks on several object instances

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Check sessions sub-tree, select the check session to run.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Check sessions panel, sort the checks by Check ID, Object, or Attribute.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the checks by using Shift or Ctrl key+left arrow or mouse click.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the contextual menu, select Add selected objects to dataset>new dataset or Add

shown objects to dataset>new dataset for all checks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Specify a name for the dataset and click OK.

Result: The Add nodes to dataset <dataset-name> window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To save the report, click Save Report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Running checks on several object instances

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-108 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a check session

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a check session.

Before you begin

Ensure that the check session to delete is available in WPS workspace.

Steps to delete a check session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Checks tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform following actions as required.

Action Steps

To delete all check sessions a. Select Delete all check sessions either from the Check

sessions sub-tree or from the Checks menu.

b. Go to Step 3.

To delete single check session. a. Select the session, and then click Delete either from the

contextual menu or from the tool bar.

b. Go to Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To confirm deletion, click Yes.

Result: The check session is removed from the Check sessions sub-tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Checks management

Deleting a check session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-109

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Audit management

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to use the WPS audit feature.

The audit feature in the WPS provides automates the data comparisons between several

MOIs.

Contents

Creating an audit profile 4-111

Updating an audit profile 4-112

Duplicating an audit profile 4-113

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications 4-114

Auditing network objects 4-115

Auditing dataset objects 4-116

Re-running an audit session 4-117

Deleting an audit session 4-118

Exporting key masks 4-119

Importing key masks 4-125

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-110 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Creating an audit profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create an audit profile.

Steps to create an audit profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS network tree, select one or several MOIs for which you want to create an

audit profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Audits menu, click Audit, or right-click the MOIs and then select Audit from

the context menu.

Result: The Audit window displaying the MOIs and a list associated templates

appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To create a new audit profile, click Create.

Result: An audit profile is created.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To apply the profile to the audit session, click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To run the audit session, click OK.

Result: The audit profile is added under the Audit profiles list in the Audit tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Creating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-111

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Updating an audit profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to update an existing audit profile for auditing the MOIs.

Steps to update an audit profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Audit profiles tree, select the profile to update.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To select a template, perform any of the following steps:

• Select the Included check box.

• Select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then select the Include

command from the context menu.

• To select all objects, select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then

select the Include all command from the context menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To remove a template from the profile, perform any of the following steps:

• Select the Exclude model values check box.

• Select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and then select the Exclude

command from the context menu.

• To remove all the templates, select the template row, right-click the Audit Profile, and

then select the Enclude all command from the context menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To save the changes, click Save all profiles from the Audit menu.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Updating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-112 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating an audit profile

Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate an existing audit profile and rename it.

Steps to duplicate an audit profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Audit profiles tree, select the profile to duplicate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Audit menu or from the right-click menu, click Duplicate....

Result: A pop window to specify a name for the audit profile appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter a name for the audit profile, and then click OK.

Result: The audit profile appears under the Audit profiles tree of the Audit tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To update the audit profile, follow the steps described in the “Updating an audit profile”

(p. 4-112) procedure.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Duplicating an audit profile

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-113

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications

Purpose

This procedure describes how to reuse audit profiles between two different WPS

application instances.

Before you begin

Before you begin, perform the following checks:

• The originating WPS application, containing the audit profile to copy is active.

• The destination WPS application is not running.

Steps to copy audit profiles

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Explorer window, navigate to the place where the originating WPS application

is installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Open the <WPS-User-home-dir>/data/user/audit/auditProfiles and copy the audit profile

XML file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Explorer window, navigate to the place where the destination WPS application

is installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Open the <WPS-User-home-dir>/data/user/audit/auditProfiles folder, then paste the

copied audit profile file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Start the destination WPS application, then select the Audit tab.

Result: The copied audit profile is loaded by the WPS and listed under the Audit

profiles tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Reusing audit profiles between different WPS applications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-114 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Auditing network objects

Purpose

This procedure describes how to audit one or several MOIs from the Network.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the MOIs to audit are available in WPS network tree.

Steps to audit network objects

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the MOIs to audit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Audit menu, or from the toolbar, click

Audit....

Result: The Audit window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select an audit profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the MOI and the associated templates or the template masks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select any of the following options to specify a report type.

• HTML Report Type

• XLS Report Type

• HTML and XLS reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK.

Result: The audit session appears under the Audit sessions of theAudit tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Auditing network objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-115

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Auditing dataset objects

Purpose

This procedure describes how to audit one or several MOIs from the Dataset.

Steps to audit dataset objects

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Datasets tree, select the objects to audit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the contextual menu or from the Audit menu, or from the toolbar, click Audit....

Result: The Audit window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select an audit profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the MOI and the associated templates or the template masks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select any of the following options to specify a report type.

• HTML Report Type

• XLS Report Type

• HTML and XLS reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK.

Result: The audit session appears under the Audit sessions of the Audit tab.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Auditing dataset objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-116 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-running an audit session

Purpose

This procedure describes how to re-run an audit session.

Before you begin

Ensure that the Audit sessions are defined in the current workspace.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.

Result: The Audits tree is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Audit sessions sub-tree, select the Audit session to be rerun.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right-click the desired Audit session to display the context-sensitive functions menu and

select Re-run audit session. You can also select the Re-run audit session menu

command either from the Audits menu or from the Audit session pane.

Result: A Re-run audit session window with a progress bar is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the audit operations must be tracked, click Save audit session....

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Re-running an audit session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-117

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting an audit session

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete an audit session.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the audit session to delete is available in the WPS.

Steps to delete an audit session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Audit tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To delete a single audit session, select the audit session from the Audit session sub-tree,

and then click Delete from the right-click menu.

Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm deletion appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To delete several audit sessions, select the Audit sessions sub-tree, from the Audit menu,

click Delete all audit sessions.

Result: A pop up window asking you to confirm the deletion appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: The audit sessions are removed from the Audit sessions sub-tree.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Deleting an audit session

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-118 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting key masks

Purpose

This procedure describes how to export the key masks.

Note: The export of key masks allows the user to export key filter defined in the

Audit tab in the CM XML format.

Steps to export key masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the File menu, select Import and export.

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-119

Result: The Import and export wizard: export key masks window appears as

shown in Figure 3-73, “Import and export wizard: export key masks” (p. 3-105).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Export key masks option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

Figure 4-18 Import and export wizard: export key masks

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-120 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Export key masks (local file system) window appears as shown in

Figure 3-74, “Export key masks (local file system)” (p. 3-106).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Browse to select a file.

Figure 4-19 Export key masks (local file system)

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-121

Result: The Select a file window appears as shown in Figure 3-75, “Select a file”

(p. 3-107).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter a filename to export the key masks.

Figure 4-20 Select a file

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-122 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Export key masks : Start window appears as shown in Figure 3-76,

“Export key masks : Start” (p. 3-108).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Start to launch the key masks export.

Figure 4-21 Export key masks : Start

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-123

Result: The progress and completion of the key masks export is displayed as shown in

Figure 3-77, “Export key masks: Completed” (p. 3-109).

You can save the report related to the key masks export (XML format).

Figure 4-22 Export key masks: Completed

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Exporting key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-124 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Importing key masks

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to import key masks into the WPS.

Note: The import of key masks allows the user to import a key mask file into a

workspace in the CM XML format.

Steps to import key masks

Perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the File menu, select Import and export.

The Import and Export wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Import key masks option as shown in Figure 3-93, “Import and Export wizard:

Import key masks” (p. 3-130).

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-125

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

The Import key masks: (Local file system) window appears as shown in Figure 3-94,

“Import key masks: (Local file system)” (p. 3-131).

Figure 4-23 Import and Export wizard: Import key masks

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-126 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Browse.

The Select a CM XML key mask file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the directory and the key mask file to import.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Open.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Start to start the import.

Figure 4-24 Import key masks: (Local file system)

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-127

You can save the report related to the key mask import (in XML format).

General WPS operating procedures

Audit management

Importing key masks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-128 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network objects (network MOI) management

Overview

Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the following network object management

procedures for normal operating procedures (if not clearly stated) as wizards are available

for this purpose. Nevertheless the network objects management procedures might be

necessary for exemption operational procedures.

Contents

Creating a network object 4-130

Duplicating a network object 4-131

Modifying a network object 4-132

Modifying a network object based on a template 4-133

Comparing a network object with a template 4-134

Comparing two object instances 4-135

Comparing attributes for an object 4-136

Exporting a network object 4-137

Deleting a network object 4-138

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-129

Creating a network object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to create a new MOI.

Prior to this procedure, Alcatel-Lucent recommends setting the proper default template in

order to minimize the MOI customizing (See “Setting template as default” (p. 4-59)). If

you have not set a template as default, the new MOI is created with the default values of

the model.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (see “Network tab” (p. 3-48)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select an element where a MOI has to be added.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the “Object editor: Edition” (p. 3-68), select the appropriate MO to be created.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Fill in the requested parameter value (the user label or the MO ID) and select the template

model to be applied.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the Create button.

Result: The new MOI appears under the selected network element.

Note:

• While creating a small cell object, you must specify a value for either longitude or

latitude. If no value is specified for longitude or latitude parameter, the small cell

object will not be created under FemtoNetwork.

• While creating a small cell group, you must specify a name for the Small Cell

Group. The relevant attribute for Small Cell Group name is groupname. This helps

in identifying the Small Cell group with the group name for sorting purpose.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Creating a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-130 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Duplicating a network object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to duplicate an MOI.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the element to duplicate and copy it either by clicking

Edit>Copy or by right-clicking and selecting Copy from the contextual menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the network tree, select a parent object to which you want to add the copied MOI

and paste the MOI either by clicking Edit>Paste or by right-clicking and selecting Paste

from the contextual menu.

Result: The Paste window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that the appropriate user label is specified for the MOI and click OK.

Result: The duplicated MOI appears under the selected network element.

Note: To paste the copied MOI several times, select the Keep window open for

pasting several times check box and click OK.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Duplicating a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-131

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a network object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to modify an MOI.

Steps to modify a network object

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform any of the following steps:

• To modify the network object manually, perform the following steps:

a. From the Object editor: Edition panel, select the parameter Attribute value

(Value column) to modify.

b. Specify the attribute values and click Set. Repeat the steps for each attribute.

• To modify the network object using a template, perform the following steps:

a. Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Propagate

template....

Result: The Propagate template... window appears.

b. Choose a template for the Available templates field.

c. Select the check box in the Apply column where the template parameter value must

be applied. Repeat the steps for each parameter.

d. Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Modifying a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-132 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying a network object based on a template

Purpose

Instead of modifying an MOI parameter after parameter, this procedure describes how to

modify it based on a template.

The template is defined in the current workspace.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See “Network tab” (p. 3-48)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select Propagate

template.... (See Templates menu in the main window).

Result: The Propagate template... window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Choose a template among the Available templates field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the check box in the Apply column where the template parameter value is to be

applied. Repeat for each parameter to be set according to the template.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Modifying a network object based on a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-133

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing a network object with a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to compare and modify a network object based on a

template.

Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you to run this procedure each time you want

to create, update, or import a template.

The template must defined in the current workspace

Before you begin

Ensure that the template is available in current workspace.

Steps to compare network objects using a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to be compared and modified.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Either from the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, click Compare with

template....

Result: The Compare 'object/instance' with template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select a template from the list of Available templates.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the appropriate arrow to update value of either the object attribute or the template

attribute. Repeat the steps for each attribute.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing a network object with a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-134 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing two object instances

Purpose

Some components in the network must be set up in the same way as the reference

component. This procedure describes how to compare two different object instances.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See “Network tab” (p. 3-48)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the reference network object instance.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the network tree, double-click (Ctrl+left click) the network object instance to audit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Either from the contextual menu or from the Edit menu, select Compare...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the appropriate arrow to update value of either the audited object attribute or the

reference object attribute. Repeat it for each attribute to be updated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing two object instances

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-135

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Comparing attributes for an object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to compare attributes for an object.

The components in the network must set in the same way on every node. Comparing

attributes for an object is necessary to ensure that the network components are

synchronized.

Steps to compare attributes for a type of object

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the network object to be audited.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the by type display option. All the related

objects to be audited are displayed with their attribute values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary sort or filter the attribute.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Comparing attributes for an object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-136 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Exporting a network object

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to export a managed network object (MOI) in the CM

XML format.

Before you begin

Ensure that the MOI to export is available and defined in the current network.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the element to export.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the contextual menu, select Export as CM XML....

Result: The Select an output directory window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the directory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter the file name, and then click OK.

Result: The Export as CM XML... window appears with a progress bar.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 After the export is completed, click Save Report... to save the report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Close.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Exporting a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-137

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a network object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to delete a MOI.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab (See “Network tab” (p. 3-48)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the network object (MOI) to delete and then click the

Delete icon.

Result: A confirmation window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Note: When deleting an FGW object from the network, ensure that the FGW is not set

as a reference object for the associatedFGWs attribute under SCATCA MOI.

General WPS operating procedures

Network objects (network MOI) management

Deleting a network object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-138 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change attribute value

Overview

Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the following attributes value change

procedures for normal operating procedures (unless clearly stated) as wizards are

available for this purpose. Nevertheless, the attributes value change procedures may be

necessary for exemption operational procedures or for some parameters that need to be

changed on a bit amount of objects all being part of the class of objects (MOC).

These procedures must be performed by the expert users who know the model well.

Contents

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab 4-140

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab 4-141

Changing attribute value using a template 4-142

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same object class 4-143

General WPS operating procedures

Change attribute value

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-139

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab

Purpose

This procedure describes how to change an attribute value using the object editor from the

Datasets tab.

Before you begin

Prior to starting procedure, the object tree path for the attribute must be identified.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Datasets tab (See “Datasets tab” (p. 3-58)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the object where the attribute value has to be changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Object editor: Edition panel, select the attribute (See “Object editor: Edition”

(p. 3-68)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the new value in the attribute details part. Modify the attributes and then click Set.

To unset the values, click Unset. For some attributes, Description and Browse options

are available.

General WPS operating procedures

Change attribute value

Changing an attribute value from the Datasets tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-140 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

Purpose

This procedure describes how to change an attribute value by using the Object editor:

Edition panel from the Network tab.

Before you begin

Ensure that the object tree path for the attribute is identified

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the object under which the attribute value must be changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the attribute.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the new value in the attribute details or modify them, and then click Set. To unset a

value, click Unset.

For some attributes, Description or Browse and link options are available.

General WPS operating procedures

Change attribute value

Changing an attribute value from the Network tab

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-141

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing attribute value using a template

Purpose

This procedure describes how to change attribute values by propagating template

attributes.

Before you begin

Ensure that the template is loaded and available in the WPS workspace.

Steps to change the attribute values using a template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the object for which the attribute values must be changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the contextual menu or from the Templates menu, select the Propagate

template....

Result: The Propagate template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select a template among the Available templates field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the check boxes for attributes to be modified. To propagate template values, click

Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply changes.

General WPS operating procedures

Change attribute value

Changing attribute value using a template

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-142 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same

object class

Purpose

This procedure describes how to change part of or all attributes values belonging to the

instances of an object.

This procedure is applicable for the Network tab and the Datasets tab.

Before you begin

Ensure that the object tree path for the attributes is identified.

Steps to change attribute values in bulk

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network or Datasets tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the object under which the attributes values must be

modified.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Object Editor: Edition panel, select the By type display.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the table display panel, select the attributes to set.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Modify the attribute values and then click Set.

To unset a value, click Unset.

For some attributes, the Description or Browse and link options are available.

Repeat the steps for other attributes.

General WPS operating procedures

Change attribute value

Changing a bulk of attributes values belonging to the same

object class

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-143

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help on Object Types

Overview

Purpose

WPS help is integrated with an UMTS Domain browser which navigates through the

model to get help in configuring network objects. It provides the following topics:

• Description of components and attributes.

• Navigation facility, based on component hierarchy or links.

• Parameter and component search facility.

See the “Help” (p. 3-41) chapter for more details.

Contents

Browsing a Network Object 4-145

Searching for an Object 4-146

General WPS operating procedures

Help on Object Types

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-144 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Browsing a Network Object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to get help in configuring a network element with the

object browser.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Help > Help, from the WPS main window.

Result: A Help on Object Types window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Domain UMTS Link.

Result: The available Network objects appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on object to get information.

Result: Attributes and children information appear.

General WPS operating procedures

Help on Object Types

Browsing a Network Object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

4-145

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Searching for an Object

Purpose

This procedure describes how to retrieve an object to get information about its

configuration.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select Help > Help.

Result: A Help on Object Types window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Find icon at the top of the window.

Result: The Find field appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the name of the object to be searched for.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Press the Enter key.

Result: The list of objects matching the search criterion appears.

General WPS operating procedures

Help on Object Types

Searching for an Object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-146 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 5Small Cells network

configuration operational

procedures

Overview

Purpose

The Small Cells network configuration operational procedures describe the commonly

used procedures for managing a network with the WPS tool.

Contents

BSRProfile Migration 5-3

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release 5-4

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release 5-6

Configuring FGW with WPS 5-7

WPS support of ATCA based FGW 5-8

Configuring FGW data in WPS 5-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS 5-11

Configuring IPC with WPS 5-12

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC 5-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS 5-19

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS 5-21

Copying configuration data from another IPC 5-24

Configuring locationProfile with WPS 5-28

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network 5-29

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region) 5-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group 5-32

Reparenting Small Cells 5-33

Reparenting a Small Cell 5-34

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-1

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk 5-37

Configuring Call Trace on NEs 5-40

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW 5-41

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC 5-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell 5-45

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

BSRProfile Migration

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the procedures to migrate a BSRProfile in an inter-release or

intra-release scenario.

Note: FAL.Plugin.AutoCreateUpdate.HigherVersionProfile is set to true by

default and WPS user is not expected to provision a higher version profile.

Contents

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release 5-4

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release 5-6

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

BSRProfile Migration

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-3

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

Purpose

This procedure describes an intra-release migration of a BSRProfile. It provides

information on migrating a BCR (x) Phase (N) BSRProfile to a BCR (x) Phase (N+y)

BSRProfile.

Related information

The BCR(x) Phase (N+y) BSRProfile template is loaded by default in the template tab of

WPS.

Before you begin

Alcatel-Lucent recommends to migrate each profile in separated workorders. After an

upgrade in BCR (x) Phase (N+y), the BSRProfile to migrate are in BCR (x) Phase (N).

A network snapshot must be loaded.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Create an empty workorder.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Network tree, select the BSRProfile to migrate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Create a template from the contextual menu.

Result: The Create template window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter a name for the template and select Capture Subtree, and then click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Templates tab, right-click on the template just created and select Migrate...

from the contextual menu.

Result: The Migrate templates window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Apply.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The Migrate templates from 'N' to 'N+y' window opens. The migrated

template appears under the 'N+y' subtree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select both the default 'N+y' template and the Migrated template from the templates

tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Right-click and from the contextual menu, select Compare...

Result: The Compare window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the differences to propagate from the default BCRx Phase 'N+y' BSRProfile to the

Migrated BSRProfile and then click Apply changes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 From the Network tree, select the Profile object of interest.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 From the Object editor: Edition panel, select a BSRProfile object and select the resulting

template, and then click Create.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 The workorder containing the BSRProfile migration is ready for use.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

Purpose

This procedure describes an inter-release migration of a BSRProfile. It provides

information on migrating a BCR (x) Phase (N) BSRProfile to a BCR (y) Phase (N)

BSRProfile.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From WPS (x) version, select all BSRProfile of interest in the network tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click and select Export as CM XML... from the contextual menu.

Result: The Select an output file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the location to where you want to export the file and enter a name for the file.

Click Save.

Result: The specified file is generated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Create a new workorder .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Import the CM XML file exported earlier. While importing select the merge with

planned network option.

Note: The workorder can be exported. In case of different BSRProfile versions, see

“Migrating a BSRProfile intra-release” (p. 5-4).

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

BSRProfile Migration

Migrating a BSRProfile inter-release

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring FGW with WPS

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to import the FGW bulk CM files into WPS and generate

batch files.

The following figure illustrates the FGW configuration procedure.

Contents

WPS support of ATCA based FGW 5-8

Configuring FGW data in WPS 5-10

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS 5-11

Figure 5-1 Import FGW configuration

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring FGW with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-7

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

ATCA based FGW

The WPS supports configuration operations for the FGW hosted on SUN servers and also

imported through OAMPreconfig.xml file.

The ATCA based FGW data can be imported in the bulk CM file format and modified in

WPS.

For the ATCA based FGW configuration, the following managed object instances are

available in WPS:

• Bladehardware

• BSG

• FGWoffloadFilter

• AAA

• BVG

• BPG

• ItfFgw

• FGWbsrSNOffloadArray

• IuCS

• IuPS

• Iuh

• Server hardware

The following figure shows the MOIs available for the ATCA based FGW configuration:

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring FGW with WPS

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

For more information on attributes and parameter values, press the F1 key or see

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management Small Cells - Parameter Reference Guide

FGW parameters , NN-20500-153P2.

Figure 5-2 ATCA based FGW MOIs

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring FGW with WPS

WPS support of ATCA based FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-9

Configuring FGW data in WPS

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify the FGW configuration data through the WPS.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that:

• The bulk CM files with FGW configuration data is available on your local directory.

For information on how to generate the FGW bulk CM configuration file, see

Alcatel-Lucent 9365 BSR Signaling Gateway - Operations, Administration,

Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-387-028.

• The supported MIM version of FGW object is available in the WPS network tree.

• The required FGW object instances are created in WPS.

To import the bulk CM file

Follow these steps to import the FGW configuration file into WPS:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the FGW object in the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the WPS operations workspace, click Import bulkcm file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the FGW configuration file from your local directory.

Result: The mediated data from the configuration files will be loaded in WPS and the

initial snapshot is replaced in the Network tab.

Note: It is recommended to run the WPS checks after importing the bulk CM files.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Modify the FGW configuration data in WPS by adding or deleting objects and modifying

attribute values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the

check.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring FGW with WPS

Configuring FGW data in WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to generate the FGW CLI script file with FGW data

configured in WPS.

Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the FGW configuration parameters

are set in WPS.

To generate FGW CLI batch file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the FGW object from the WPS tree view and click Generate CLI batch file from

WPS operations workspace.

Note: This feature is available only in FGW MIM V3.0 or later versions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the destination directory to store the file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To generate reversed CLI batch file, select the Generate reversed CLI file check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

Result: WPS generates the CLI script file.

Reference: For information on loading the updated FGW configuration CLI batch

file, see Alcatel-Lucent 9365 BSR Signaling Gateway - Operations, Administration,

Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-387-028.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring FGW with WPS

Generating FGW CLI file in WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring IPC with WPS

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to configure IPC with WPS.

The WPS is enhanced with following features to support IPC configuration:

• WPS toolset

This includes tabular editor, CM XML import and export options, and features such as

workorder synchronization, template management, and checks.

• IPC CLI script generation

This feature provides a mechanism to perform bulk operation on IPC data and thus

minimizes the server impacts to the end user.

• Load IPC Snapshot

This feature provides a mechanism to import a db_walk.dump IPC snapshot into

WPS.

Contents

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC 5-13

Customizing IPC data with WPS 5-19

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS 5-21

Copying configuration data from another IPC 5-24

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to generate the db_walk.dump file at IPC.

The db_walk.dump can be imported into WPS as described in the following procedure

and used for configuring IPC from WPS.

To generate db_walk.dump file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check if OAMLMTGwServer is running by executing the following command:

rnccheckservers

Result: If the server is running, the following output will be displayed.

AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1 OAMLMTGwCapsule fms02 ACT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Log on to IPC FMSblade of the OAMLMTGwServer server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Go to the /flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin directory .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To generate the db_walk.dump file, run the datablitz_meosDump.ksh script.

Result: The db_walk.dump file will be generated in the /flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin

directory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Save the db_walk.dump file to your local directory.

Example:

The following example shows the content of a sample db_walk.dump file.

Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Parsing line 1

Walking the mo Ipc.Top

*** Mo definition not found Ipc.Top

Parsing line 2

Walking the mo Ipc.EquipmentHolder

*** Mo definition not found Ipc.EquipmentHolder

Parsing line 3

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Walking the mo Ipc.ForcedManagedResource

*** Mo definition not found Ipc.ForcedManagedResource

Parsing line 4

Walking the mo Ipc.UnForcedManagedResource

*** Mo definition not found Ipc.UnForcedManagedResource

Parsing line 5

Walking the mo Ipc.ManagedResource

*** Mo definition not found Ipc.ManagedResource

Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Parsing line 1

Walking the mo Ipc.IPCEquipment

Ipc.IPCEquipment is empty

===============================================

Parsing line 2

Walking the mo Ipc.AuditEntity

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=1)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=1, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="RSM_

SCRAMBLING_CODE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="BSC-RSM",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.RSCAuditCommComponent.0.", Unsig

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=2)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=2, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="DOWNLINK_

CHANNELISATION_TREE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="BSC-DLCH",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.DCTAuditCommComponent.0.", Unsig

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=3)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=3, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REMOTE_

VIEW_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RemoteView", UnsignedInteger

lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName

scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.RemoteViewAuditCommComponent.0."

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=4)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=4, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="OAM_DATA_

AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="OAMData", UnsignedInteger

lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName

scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.OAMDataAuditCommComponent.0.", U

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=5)

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=5, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_

STATE_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshState",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=1197385673, RunStatus runStatus=

NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshStateAudCommComponent.0."

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=6)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=6, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_

FAULT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshFault",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshFaultAudCommComponent.0."

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=7)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=7, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_

INVENTORY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshInventory",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshInventoryAudCommComponent

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=8)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=8, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_

DEPENDENCY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RefreshDependency",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshDependencyAudCommComponen

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=9)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=9, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="REFRESH_

DEGRADEDGROUP_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=

"RefreshDegradedGroup", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus

runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshDegradedGroupAudCommCompo

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=10)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=10, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,

BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString

entityDescription="REFRESH_FAILUREGROUP_AUDIT", DisplayString

entityName="RefreshFailureGroup", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,

RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RefreshFailureGroupAudCommCompon

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=11)

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-15

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=11, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,

BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString

entityDescription="SUEG_EMERGENCY_CALL_COUNT_AUDIT", DisplayString

entityName="SUEGEmergencyCallCount", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=

0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName

scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMScheduler.0.Integer.SUEGECAuditCommComponent.0.", Un

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=12)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=12, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="EXECUTE_

DEFERRED_RECOVERY_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=

"ExecuteDeferredRecovery", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,

RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.DeferredRecoveryAudCommComponent.0.

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=13)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=13, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="RECOVERY_

MONITOR_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="RecoveryMonitor",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RecoveryMonitorAudCommComponent.0."

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=14)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=14, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="UE_

CONTEXT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="UEContext",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.UEContextAudCommComponent.0.", U

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=15)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=15, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCTRUE, BooleanType

enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString entityDescription="NODEB_

CELL_CONTEXT_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName="NodeBCellContext",

UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING,

DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.NodeBCellContextAudCommComponent

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=16)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=16, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,

BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString

entityDescription="REDUNDANT_STATE_SYNC_AUDIT", DisplayString

entityName="RedundantStateSync", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0,

RunStatus runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.MEOServer.0.Integer.RedundantStateSyncAudCommComponent.

Dn: (LIPC=1, AuditEntity=17)

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=

[], Integer id=17, BooleanType enableCorrection=RNCFALSE,

BooleanType enableScheduling=RNCTRUE, DisplayString

entityDescription="DB_REPLICATION_AUDIT", DisplayString entityName=

"DBReplication", UnsignedInteger lastAttemptTime=0, RunStatus

runStatus=NOTRUNNING, DistinguishedName scheduledComponent=

"Integer.PROOT.0.Integer.OAMDataAudit.0.Integer.DBReplicationAuditCommCompone

===============================================

Parsing line 3

Walking the mo Ipc.BearerQOS

Dn: (LIPC=1, BearerQOS=10)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="Voice (5.9 AMR) - high delay

sensitivity (150 ms)", Sequence sparesBool=[], Sequence sparesInt=[],

Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=[], Integer id=1,

UnsignedInteger aAl2QOSIndicator=10, UnsignedInteger

guaranteedBackwardRate=0, UnsignedInteger guaranteedForwardRate=0,

InterfaceType interfaceType=IUCS, UnsignedInteger

maximumBackwardRate=18, UnsignedInteger maximumForwardRate=18,

UnsignedInteger serviceRateDL=12200, UnsignedInteger serviceRateUL=

12200, ServiceType serviceType=STNOTAPPLICABLE, TrafficClass

trafficClass=CONV

Dn: (LIPC=1, BearerQOS=20)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="Voice (4.75 AMR) - high delay

sensitivity (150 ms)", Sequence sparesBool=[], Sequence sparesInt=[],

Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence sparesString=[], Integer id=1,

UnsignedInteger aAl2QOSIndicator=20, UnsignedInteger

guaranteedBackwardRate=0, UnsignedInteger guaranteedForwardRate=0,

InterfaceType interfaceType=IUCS, UnsignedInteger

maximumBackwardRate=79, UnsignedInteger maximumForwardRate=79,

UnsignedInteger serviceRateDL=64000, UnsignedInteger serviceRateUL=

64000, ServiceType serviceType=STNOTAPPLICABLE, TrafficClass

trafficClass=CONV

===============================================

Parsing line 4

Walking the mo Ipc.OAMPrivate

Dn: (LIPC=1, OAMPrivate=1)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="OAMPrivate", Sequence sparesBool=

[], Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence

sparesString=[], Integer id=1

===============================================

Parsing line 5

Walking the mo Ipc.SuMgr

Dn: (LIPC=1, SuMgr=1)

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="", Sequence sparesBool=[],

Sequence sparesInt=[], Sequence sparesReal=[], Sequence

sparesString=[], Integer id=1, BooleanType abortFlag=RNCFALSE,

SuRequestData requestData={"", "", "", "", INVALIDSWTYPE,

SUACTIONNOTDEFINED, INVALIDSURELEASETYPE, RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, "",

RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, RNCFALSE, SUFWUPGRADE}, SuClusterState

suClusterState=GRACTIVATECOMPLETE, SuCommitResult

suCommitActionStatus=SUCOMMITUNDEFINED, SuDeleteResult

suDeleteActionStatus=SUDELETEUNDEFINED, SuFWUpdateResult

suFWUpdateActionStatus=SUFWUPDATEUNDEFINED, SuGetPkgInfoResult

suGetPkgInfoStatus=SUGETPKGINFOUNDEFINED, SuGetVersionsResult

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-17

suGetVersionsStatus=SUGETVERSIONSUNDEFINED, BooleanType

suInfoSyncFlag=RNCTRUE, SuPrecheckResult suPrecheckActionResult=

SUPRECHECKUNDEFINEDRESULT, SuPrecheckAction suPrecheckActionType=

SUPRECHECKUNDEFINEDACTION, UnsignedInteger suProgressIndicatorNumber=

0, DisplayString suProgressIndicatorString="", DisplayString

suTPUCurrentSwVersion="", SoftwareStates suTPUState=CHECKCOMPLETE

===============================================

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating db_walk dump file at IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Customizing IPC data with WPS

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to perform initial configuration of IPC and define values

for the Managed Object (MO) attributes.

Before you begin

The following prerequisites must be met to carry out this procedure successfully:

• IPC is set with Day1 data (delivered as part of the IPC software).

• The Day1 data is available on the local directory as the db_walk.dump file.

For more information on db_walk.dump file generation, see “Generating db_walk dump

file at IPC” (p. 5-13).

To customize IPC data

Follow these steps to customize MO attributes of IPC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, click the Network tab and then click Edition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Object creation:create drop-down, select IPC and specify the user label for

the object. Click Create.

Result: The IPC object will be created and added to the workspace.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To customize IPC object attributes, select IPC from the WPS tree view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the object type LIPC and the instance, and then click Create.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To import the db_walk.dump file content, click Load IPC Snapshot file.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Customizing IPC data with WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-19

Result: The Load IPC snapshot file option, when executed by importing the

db_walk.dump file, replaces the initial snapshot, keeps all current workorders, creates

a new delta workorder and a new empty workorder for WPS to record the

configuration updates.

Note:

• The delta workorder created during the process contains the Day1 data already

present in the IPC, therefore it cannot be translated into an executable CLI script.

• The configuration changes done after the Day1 data import are recorded in the

empty workorder, which can be translated into an executable CLI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Update the IPC configuration data by adding or deleting objects, and modifying

parameters.

Note: You must define parameters for the mandatory objects such as IuPS and IuCS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the

check.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Customizing IPC data with WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

Before you begin

Ensure that the IPC is configured by loading the IPC snapshot file into WPS.

For more information on loading the IPC snapshot file, see “Customizing IPC data with

WPS” (p. 5-19).

To generate IPC CLI file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the LIPC object instance from the WPS tree view and click Generate IPC CLI file

and reverse using current workorder.

Result: The current workorder is exported in the IPC CLI format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Browse your local directory and select the location to which you want save the CLI script.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To import the IPC configuration data stored in the IPC CLI script, execute the following

commands on the IPC:

/flx/RNCinitdb/current/bin/meosCli

/flx/RNCinitdb/versions/TEST

Result: The configuration data exported from WPS is transferred to the IPC.

Example:

.20090430.191418.sdcteam_ipcutils_b2.2_BSR_IPC_02.02.01.03_

xb6407e74/bin/LIPC.cli

Trying to connect to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Connected to the host rncfmstvcip on port 29051

Could not load EditLine library. Using simple stdin.

MofCli> set (LIPC=1,IuPS=1)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,IuPSIP=1)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,SNMP=1)\

userLabel="SNMP"

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-21

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,PeerIPSP=1)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,PeerIPSP=2)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7LinkSet=1)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7LinkSet=2)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

set (LIPC=1,SS7Stack=1,SS7StackInst=0)\

userLabel="ALUniv"

>MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="SNMP"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

MofCli> Verifying the set with the get from the managed

object server

Attributes: DisplayString userLabel="ALUniv"

Note: If a read-write attribute is updated in WPS, LIPC must be reset to load the

configuration with the updated value.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify if the database is updated with configuration changes. Check the connectivity to all

FMS servers by executing the following command:

rnccheckservers

Result:

Configuration Manager active on fms01

STATE SERVER CAPSULE NODE TYPE

=======================================================AVAIL

LogMgrInstance.1 OAMLogMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMAlarmMgr.2 OAMAlarmMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMBUMgr.1 OAMBUMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMDataAuditServer.1OAMDataAuditServerCapsulefms ACT

AVAIL OAMEATranslator.1 OAMEATranslatorCapsulefms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMFMSTranslator.1OAMFMSTranslatorCapsulefms01ACT

AVAIL OAMInterfaceRAgent.1OAMInterfaceRCapsulefms02ACT

AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1 OAMLMTGwCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMMEOServer.1 OAMMEOServerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMOAMSchedulerServer.1 OAMOAMSchedulerServerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMOFManager.1 OAMOFManagerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMPMServer.1 OAMPerfMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMShelfTranslator.1OAMShelfTranslatorCapsulfms0 ACT

AVAIL OAMSignalTranslator.1OAMSignalTranslatorCapsulefms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSIHBServer.2 OAMAlarmMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSUMgr.1 OAMSUMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSysCoordServer.1OAMSysCoordServerCapsulefms02 ACT

AVAILABLE: 17 UNAVAILABLE: 0 INITIALIZED: 0 RECOVERING: 0

OFFLINE: 0 WAITFORPROMOTE : 0 INVALID : 0

[RNC 24:fms01]

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To check the status of the FMSblade, execute the following command:

RCCcstat

Result:

RCC Cluster [FLXcluster] Status

fms01 2 L - LEAD

fms02 3 A - ACTIVE

[RNC 24:fms01]->

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Copying configuration data from another IPC

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to compare configuration data of one IPC (Day-one data)

with an other IPC (pre-configured data) by using WPS.

The Compare objects feature in WPS allows users to compare the configuration data of

two IPC object instances and copy the required configuration from one IPC to another.

Before you begin

To complete this procedure successfully, ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

• The IPC object instances are created with different user labels in WPS.

• A db_walk.dump file with the Day1 data is available on your local directory.

• A db_walk.dump file, which contains the IPC configuration data you intend to use for

configuring another IPC, is available on your local directory.

For more information on generating the db_walk.dump file, see “Generating db_walk

dump file at IPC” (p. 5-13).

To modify IPC with the configuration data of another IPC

Follow these steps to compare the configuration data of two IPCs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Load the db_walk.dump file with Day1 data to WPS. To import the content from the file,

click Load IPC snapshot file at one selected LIPC, for example, IPC/1, LIPC/1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Load the db_walk.dump file with the configuration information into WPS. To import the

content from the file, click Load IPC snapshot file at another selected LIPC, for example,

IPC/2, LIPC/1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the IPC object instances you want to compare, for example, IPC/1, LIPC/1 and

IPC/2, LIPC/1. From the Edit menu, click Compare.

The following screen with the configuration data appears.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Apply the changes from one IPC object instance to another, for example, IPC/2, LIPC/1

(IPC with the configuration data) into IPC/1, LIPC/1 (IPC with the day-one data).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Run WPS checks on the current workorder and make the required changes to pass the

check.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Generate IPC CLI file and reverse using current workorder for the IPC object

that you want to modify. The IPC CLI script will be generated.

Figure 5-3 Compare data of two IPC objects

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-25

For more information on the IPC CLI script generation procedure, see “Generating IPC

CLI batch file from WPS” (p. 5-21).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To apply modifications to IPC, import the CLI script file into IPC. For more information

on importing CLI script into IPC, see “Generating IPC CLI batch file from WPS”

(p. 5-21).

Note: If a read-write attribute is updated in WPS, LIPC must be reset to load the

configuration with the updated value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Verify if the database is updated with configuration changes. Check the connectivity to all

FMS servers by executing the following command:

rnccheckservers

Result:

Configuration Manager active on fms01

STATE SERVER CAPSULE NODE TYPE

=======================================================AVAIL

LogMgrInstance.1 OAMLogMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMAlarmMgr.2 OAMAlarmMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMBUMgr.1 OAMBUMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMDataAuditServer.1OAMDataAuditServerCapsulefms ACT

AVAIL OAMEATranslator.1 OAMEATranslatorCapsulefms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMFMSTranslator.1OAMFMSTranslatorCapsulefms01ACT

AVAIL OAMInterfaceRAgent.1OAMInterfaceRCapsulefms02ACT

AVAIL OAMLMTGwServer.1 OAMLMTGwCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMMEOServer.1 OAMMEOServerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMOAMSchedulerServer.1 OAMOAMSchedulerServerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMOFManager.1 OAMOFManagerCapsule fms01 ACT

AVAIL OAMPMServer.1 OAMPerfMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMShelfTranslator.1OAMShelfTranslatorCapsulfms0 ACT

AVAIL OAMSignalTranslator.1OAMSignalTranslatorCapsulefms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSIHBServer.2 OAMAlarmMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSUMgr.1 OAMSUMgrCapsule fms02 ACT

AVAIL OAMSysCoordServer.1OAMSysCoordServerCapsulefms02 ACT

AVAILABLE: 17 UNAVAILABLE: 0 INITIALIZED: 0 RECOVERING: 0

OFFLINE: 0 WAITFORPROMOTE : 0 INVALID : 0

[RNC 24:fms01]

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 To check the status of the FMSblade, execute the following command:

RCCcstat

Result:

RCC Cluster [FLXcluster] Status

fms01 2 L - LEAD

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

fms02 3 A - ACTIVE

[RNC 24:fms01]->

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring IPC with WPS

Copying configuration data from another IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to create the LocationProfile and link the LocationProfile to a

Small Cell group and location with WPS . The location profile needs to be set for regional

based network topology.

Contents

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network 5-29

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region) 5-31

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group 5-32

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to create the location profile in a region based small cell

network.

Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a

region-based network and consists of the locationProfile MO.

To create LocationProfile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS main window, select the Network tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the network tree, select the element Network and click the Edition tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the MO

LocationProfile[OAM/OAM].

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values. The LocationProfile

MO is created in the network tree for configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the LocationProfile MO created in Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child

object BSRLocationProfile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values . The

BSRLocationProfile child object is created under LocationProfile MO.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Under BSRLocationProfile created in Step 7, select the Lcell MO and set the required

parameter values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child

object GsmFrequencyList.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 In the Edition tab, from the Object creation: create drop-down menu, select the child

object MacroUMTSCellFrequencyList.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click the Create button and fill in the appropriate parameter values.

Result: The LocationProfile is created in the region based Small Cell network.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Creating LocationProfile in region-based Small Cell network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to configure the location profile for a location in

region-based network topology.

Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a

region-based network and consists of the managed objects; locationProfile and Location.

To configure LocationProfile for a location

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Network tree; under the managed object Locations/0, select the appropriate

location (for example: Location/0).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Edition tab, select the parameter locationProfile and click Browse.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the appropriate LocationProfile (for example: LocationProfile/0) from list of

location profiles displayed, and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Set to set the locationProfile for the selected location.

Result: The LocationProfile is configured for the selected location (region).

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Configuring LocationProfile for a location (region)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to configure the location profile for a Small Cell group in

region-based network topology.

Before you begin

To carry out this procedure successfully, ensure that the Small Cell network is a

region-based network and consists of the managed objects; locationProfile, Location, and

FemoGroup.

To configure LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Network tree; under the managed object FemtoCluster (for example:

FemtoCluster/0), select the appropriate Small Cell group (for example: FemtoGroup/1).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Edition tab, select the parameter locationProfile and click Browse.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the appropriate LocationProfile (for example: LocationProfile/0) from list of

location profiles displayed, and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Set to set the locationProfile for the selected Small Cell group.

Result: The LocationProfile is configured for the selected Small Cell group.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring locationProfile with WPS

Configuring LocationProfile for a Small Cell group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting Small Cells

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to reparent a small cell and perform a bulk operation in WPS

to reparent small cells to a Small Cell Cluster or group.

Contents

Reparenting a Small Cell 5-34

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk 5-37

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-33

Reparenting a Small Cell

Purpose

Use this procedure to reparent small cells to a Small Cell cluster.

Before you begin

To perform reparenting operations on a small cell successfully, ensure that the following

prerequisites are met:

• The FemtoCluster instance and the Femto objects are created with appropriate values

and user labels in WPS.

• All the required configuration files such as bulk CM are loaded into WPS.

To reparent a small cell

Follow these steps to reparent a small cell:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS workspace, click the small cell object you want to reparent.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Overview tab and then click Re-parent Femto.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Result: The following screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the target small cell cluster or group to which you want to re-parent the small cell.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Add appropriate values for the Target Femto Id, Target Femto Latitude, Target Femto

longitude, Target Femto locationAreaCode, Target Femto routingAreaCode, Target

Femto serviceAreaCode, notAllowedBsrIds, and Target bsr Id attributes.

Figure 5-4 Small Cell reparenting

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-35

Ensure that the attributes assigned to FemtoCluster objects are unique. For example, each

small cell must have a unique ID. When a Femtocluster is created or modified with a

manual BSRID, the WPS checks to see if the manual BSRID value provided is not listed

in the notAllowedBsrIds. If it is listed, then WPS displays an error message indicating

that the manual value provided is blocked from being assigned to any femto.

Note: All attributes except Target bsr Id are mandatory. If there is no value assigned

to the Target bsr Id attribute, the bsrId for the small cell will not be set. Therefore,

ensure that you set this attribute with an appropriate value or the default value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result: The small cell will be reparented to the specified target Small Cell group or

cluster, and the configuration data will be updated with the new values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Run the WPS checks and make the required changes to pass the check.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting a Small Cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

Purpose

Use this procedure to reparent more than one small cell at a time.

Before you begin

To perform bulk reparenting operations on a small cell cluster, ensure that the following

prerequisites are met:

• The FemtoCluster instance and the Femto objects are created with appropriate values

and user labels in WPS.

• All the required configuration files such as bulk CM are loaded into WPS.

To reparent small cells in bulk

Follow these steps to carry out the bulk reparenting operation:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the WPS workspace, click the small cell object you want to reparent.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Overview tab and then click Bulk Femto Reparenting.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-37

Result: The following screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To generate a template for bulk reparenting, click Generate.

Result: The template will be created in the .xls format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Add appropriate values for the Target Femto Id, Target Femto Latitude, Target Femto

longitude, Target Femto locationAreaCode, Target Femto routingAreaCode, Target

Femto serviceAreaCode, and Target bsr Id attributes.

Ensure that the attributes assigned to FemtoCluster objects are unique. For example, each

femto must have a unique ID.

Note: All attributes, except Target bsr Id, are mandatory. If there is no value assigned

to the Target bsr Id attribute, the bsrId for the small cell will not be set. Therefore,

ensure that you set this attribute with an appropriate value or the default value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Save the template to your local directory.

Figure 5-5 Bulk reparenting

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To import the bulk reparenting Excel file with the updated FemtoCluster attributes, click

Bulk Femto Reparenting.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the bulk reparenting Excel file from your local directory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.

Result: The FemtoCluster configuration data will be updated with the new values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Run the WPS checks and make the required changes to pass the check.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Reparenting Small Cells

Reparenting Small Cells in bulk

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-39

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to activate Call Trace sessions on small cell network elements

such as FGW, IPC, and Small Cells.

Contents

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW 5-41

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC 5-43

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell 5-45

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW

Purpose

This procedure describes how to activate Call Trace sessions on FGW.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

• The WMS and WPS tools are installed.

• The key based authentication setup for SFTP to transfer files to NE is available for the

fgwuser.

Procedure overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select FGW (OAM object) from the WPS tree view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Object Editor: Overview panel, click Import bulkcm file.

Result: The Operation: Import bulkcm file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the bulkCm.xml containing FGW configuration data.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK to import the data into WPS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 After the successful import of FGW configuration data, select the FGWConfig→ItfFgw→SubscriberTraceConfig object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Set the subscriberTraceEnable attribute to True.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Ensure that the appropriate values are set for the following attributes:

• sftpServer - Indicates the host name or IP address of the file server to which the

Subscriber Trace files are sent by the FGW.

• rootDirectory - Indicates the root directory for trace files. The default root directory is

/opt/nortel/data/utran/observation/subscriberTrace.

• userLabel - Indicates the label for the call trace managed objects.

• maxParallelSubscriberTraces - Indicates the maximum number of active parallel call

traces that can be supported on the FGW.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-41

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Object Editor: Edition panel, create the SubscriberTrace object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the SubscriberTrace object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 To activate call trace on FGW, set the administrativeState attribute to unlocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Ensure that the appropriate values are set for the following parameters:

• iMSI - Indicates the UE identification code.

• traceId - Refers to the identifier of a trace session.

• traceReportingPeriod - Indicates the time interval for trace file reporting.

• traceDuration - Indicates the duration of the tracing activity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 To run checks, select the FGW object, right-click and select Run Checks from the

contextual menu. Resolve errors, if any.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Generate the CLI batch file. For more information, see “Generating FGW CLI file in

WPS” (p. 5-11).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Import FGW configuration data. For information on loading the updated FGW

configuration CLI batch file, see Alcatel-Lucent 9365 BSR Signaling Gateway -

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-387-028.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on FGW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

Purpose

This procedure describes how to activate Call Trace sessions on IPC.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

• The WMS and WPS tools are installed.

• The SFTP setup to transfer files to NEs is available for ftpuser.

Procedure overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select IPC→LIPC from the WPS tree view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Object Editor: Overview panel, click Load IPC snapshot file.

Result: The Load IPC snapshot file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the dbwalk.dump file containing IPC configuration data.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK to import the data into WPS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 After the successful import of IPC configuration data, select the LIPC→SubscriberTraceConfig object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Set the subscriberTraceEnable attribute to True.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Ensure that the appropriate values are set for the following attributes:

• sftpServer - Indicates the host name or IP address of the file server to which the

Subscriber Trace files are sent by the IPC.

• rootDirectory - Indicates the root directory for trace files. The default root directory is

/opt/nortel/data/utran/observation/subscriberTrace.

• userLabel - Indicates the label for the call trace managed objects.

• maxParallelSubscriberTraces - Indicates the maximum number of active parallel call

traces that can be supported on the IPC.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-43

• password - Indicates the password to use for IPC authentication, to access the file

server.

• username - Indicates the user name to use for IPC authentication, to access the file

server. The default user name for IPC is ftpuser.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Object Editor: Edition panel, create the SubscriberTrace object under

IPC->LIPC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the SubscriberTrace object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 To activate call trace on IPC, set the administrativeState attribute to unlocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Ensure that the appropriate values are set for the following parameters:

• iMSI - Indicates the UE identification code.

• traceId - Refers to the identifier of a trace session.

• traceReportingPeriod - Indicates the time interval for trace file reporting.

• traceDuration - Indicates the duration of the tracing activity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 To run checks, select the IPC object, right-click and select Run Checks from the

contextual menu. Resolve errors, if any.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Generate the CLI batch file. For more information, see “Generating IPC CLI batch file

from WPS” (p. 5-21).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Import the configuration data into IPC as described in “Generating IPC CLI batch file

from WPS” (p. 5-21).

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on IPC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell

Purpose

This procedure describes how to activate Call Trace sessions on a small cell using the

BSR profile object in WPS.

Before you begin

Before you begin, ensure that the following prerequisites are met:

• The WMS and WPS tools are installed.

• The key-based authentication setup for SFTP to transfer files to NEs is available for

ftpuser.

Procedure overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Import the snapshot with current network view and BSRProfile configuration data into

WPS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 After the successful import of BSR profile configuration data, select the BSRProfile→SubscriberTraceConfig object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set the subscriberTraceEnable attribute to True.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that the appropriate values are set for the following attributes:

• sftpServer - Indicates the host name or IP address of the file server to which the

Subscriber Trace files are sent.

• rootDirectory - Indicates the root directory for trace files. The default root directory is

/opt/nortel/data/utran/observation/subscriberTrace.

• userLabel - Indicates the label for the call trace managed objects.

• maxParallelSubscriberTraces - Indicates the maximum number of active parallel call

traces that can be supported on the small cells.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To run checks, select the BSRProfile object, right-click and select Run Checks from the

contextual menu. Resolve errors, if any.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Export the workorder containing the configuration data.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

5-45

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Activate the workorder using WMS. For more information on activating a workorder, see

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - User Guide, NN-20500-208.

Small Cells network configuration operational procedures

Configuring Call Trace on NEs

Activating Call Trace sessions on a small cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 6Terminology

Glossary of terms

Acronyms and abbreviations

This chapter lists the acronyms, abbreviations, and terms specific to the Small Cell

Management System (SCMS).

Terminology Definition or Meaning

AAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting

Authentication, Authorization and Accounting is a way of checking

user access to a network.

• Authentication: verifies the user identity, with a password

requirement or other mechanism.

• Authorization: verifies what the users are allowed to do, for

example, the services they can access or the levels of quality of

service that can be applied.

• Accounting: provides billing according to different principles

such as time, data volume, application used, and provider.

ACS Automatic Configuration Server or Auto-Configuration Server

The Auto-Configuration Server (ACS) is a management application

controlled by a service provider that takes care of configuring the

Layer-3 and higher layer features and parameters of the residential

Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).

ALSMS Alcatel-Lucent Security Management System

The Alcatel-Lucent Security Gateway Management System

provides OAM functions for the BVG network element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

6-1

Terminology Definition or Meaning

BPG BSR Packet Gateway

A BPG acts as a concentrator for the Internet interface for a Small

Cell cluster, presenting a single IP address towards the SGSN from

a "virtual RNC" represented by the BPG. It performs port and

address translation to enable routing to or from the base station

routers (BSR Gateways). Depending on the number of BSR

Gateways in the cluster, several BPGs may be deployed per Small

Cell cluster.

BSS Business Support System

BVG BSR Voice Gateway

The BVG acts as the "virtual" MSC router for the BSR Gateway

and as the "virtual" RNC router for the MSC (Note: IuUP is

transparent to the BVG).

CoA Care of Address

In Internet routing, a care-of address is a temporary IP address for a

mobile node (mobile device) that enables message delivery when

the device is connecting from somewhere other than its home

network.

CPE Customer Premise Equipment

The Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) is a generic term used to

describe all customer devices, including modems, Integrated Access

Devices (IAD), Residential Gateways (RGW) and terminals.

CSM Customer Support Manager

CSR Customer Service Representative

CWMP CPE WAN Management Protocol

The CPE WAN Management Protocol (CWMP) is a protocol

defined by the DSL forum's Technical Report TR-69 for secure

auto-configuration as well as other CPE management functions.

device managementManagement of CPE devices including the following main

processes and functions:

• Bootstrap provisioning: installing parameters and applications

on a device to establish a given service for the first time, or for

resetting a device to initial settings

• Continuous provisioning: updating a device with new data,

parameters, or application upgrades to replace pre-existing

versions

• Retrieval of management information from devices

• Remote device troubleshooting.

Terminology Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Terminology Definition or Meaning

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DHP Digital Home Platform

DSL Digital Subscriber Line

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node

The Gateway GPRS Support Node has the function to interconnect

the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network with the

external world, such as the Internet. The GGSN can help mobile

packet network operators to evolve to suppliers of high added value

services.

HGW Home GateWay

HLR Home Location Register

It is the main database of permanent subscriber information for a

mobile network. It contains location, subscription, and

authentication information.

HDM Alcatel-Lucent Home Device Manager

This node is responsible for the Small Cell unit configuration

updates in conjunction with Small Cell Management system, status

monitoring, problem diagnosis, troubleshooting, and software or

firmware upgrade management.

HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSDPA was introduced by 3GPP to improve the DL. HSDPA is an

introduction of a new transport channel that is only available in the

downlink.

HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access

HSUPA was introduced by 3GPP to improve the UL. HSUPA is an

enhancement of classical dedicated channels. It is also known as

Enhanced Dedicated Channel (EDCH).

This provides the same quality of high-speed services offered on

fixed-line broadband access systems to mobile users.

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

A code which uniquely identifies a subscription and serves as a key

to derive subscriber information such as directory number(s) from

the home location register.

Terminology Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

6-3

Terminology Definition or Meaning

IP Internet Protocol

Internet Protocol (IP) specifies the format of packets (or datagrams)

and the addressing scheme for sending information over the

Internet or some other network.

IP autoconfiguration IP auto-configuration minimizes or eliminates the effort required by

the user to configure the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) IP

settings, but without merely shifting that burden to the operator.

This is achieved by developing network mechanisms that automate

initial IP configuration and life cycle management of the CPE.

IPC Alcatel-Lucent Iu Protocol Converter

This optional network element converts Iu (IuCS and IuPS) traffic

over ATM to Iu traffic over IP for transmission within the Small

Cell cluster. It is only offered where IuCS over IP capable MSC is

not available in the operator network.

IPsec IP security

The IPsec Router terminates the secure tunnel from the Small Cell

which secures traffic across the non-trusted backhaul connection. It

includes firewall functionality to protect the operators core network

against intrusion and denial of service attacks.

J2EE Java 2 Enterprise Edition

JMS Java Message Service

LA Location Area

An area in which a mobile station may move freely without

updating the location register. A location area may comprise one or

several routing areas, and one or more cells.

LAC Location Area Code

MIP Mobile Internet Protocol

MMS Multimedia Message Service

A service - standardized by 3rd Generation Partnership Project

(3GPP) - for sending multimedia messages including a combination

of text, audio, graphics, image, animation, and video.

MSC Mobile Switching Center

The MSC is an exchange that performs the functions of switching,

routing and control of the call, as well as charging and accounting,

and controls interworking with fixed networks. It is in charge of

managing the circuit switching communication between mobile

handsets, the transmission of Short Messages, and handover (when

needed).

Terminology Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Terminology Definition or Meaning

NBI NorthBound Interface

NBS NorthBound System

NTP Network Time Protocol

This is used to guarantee the timing throughout the network by

using a single clock as the reference for all the Network elements

OSS Operations Support System

PDP Packet Data Protocol

Any protocol which transmits data as discrete units known as

packets, for example, IP, or X.25.

PPP Point to Point Protocol

PSC Primary Scrambling Code

QoS Quality of Service

The Quality of Service (QoS) is a measure of how good the data is

delivered to the end user (how much packet loss, jitter, delay, and

so on). It is used to differentiate telecommunication services based

on measurable parameters evaluated or controlled through network

monitoring. QoS expresses and verifies the capability of a network

to fulfill a Service Level Agreement or to grant that some specific

parameters (technology-dependent) do not exceed predefined

limits.

RA Routing Area The total area served by a mobile network is

organized in small geographical divisions called Routing Areas.

Each Routing Area is, in turn, divided into smaller units called

cells.

RAC Routing Area Code

RPC Remote Procedure Call

SAM Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager

SCMS Alcatel-Lucent Small Cell Management System

SMC Service Management Client

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSM Self Service Manager

STB Set-Top Box

TR-069 Technical Report 069.

This is a DSL Forum technical specification entitled CPE WAN

Management Protocol (CWMP). It defines an application layer

protocol for remote management of end-user DSL devices.

Terminology Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

6-5

Terminology Definition or Meaning

UE User Equipment (UE).

This refers to the combination of Mobile Equipment (ME) and

smart card. It can also include other equipment, for example, a

laptop computer.

URL Uniform Resource Locator

VoIP Voice Over Internet Protocol.

VoIP (voice over IP - that is, voice delivered using the Internet

Protocol) is used in IP telephony for a set of facilities for managing

the delivery of voice information using the Internet Protocol (IP). It

means sending voice information in a packet mode rather than in a

circuit mode used by the Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN).

VPN Virtual Private Network

A network exhibiting at least some of the characteristics of a private

network, even though it uses the resources of a public switched

network.

WAN Wide Area Network

A Wide Area Network (WAN) is a geographical dispersed long-haul

telecommunications network usually made up of backbone links.

The term distinguishes a broader telecommunication structure from

a Local Area Network. A WAN may be privately owned or rented,

but the term usually connotes the inclusion of public networks that

are highly regulated and provide superior reliability and resilience.

WAP Wireless Access Protocol

Wireless Application Protocol is the current standard for providing

Internet communications on digital mobile phones, personal digital

assistants and other wireless terminals.

WMS Small Cells Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System Small Cells

WPS Small Cells Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System Small Cells

XML eXtensible Markup Language

Terminology Glossary of terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Index

A audit profiles, 2-39

audit sessions, 2-39

audits, 2-39

................................................................................................

B bulk provisioning

using tabular editor, 2-56

................................................................................................

C check profiles defined, 2-37

check sessions, 2-37

checks defined, 2-14, 2-37

Citrix

license requirements, 2-6

comparison of MOIs defined, 2-29

configuration change events defined, 2-11

conventions used, xxvii

current selection defined, 2-12

................................................................................................

D data sharing deployment defined, 2-53

dataset defined, 2-13

datasets defined, 2-41

document

revision history, xxv

document support, xxviii

................................................................................................

E event propagation defined, 2-11

external interfaces defined, 2-43

................................................................................................

F feature specific defined, 2-13

................................................................................................

G global update of MOIs defined, 2-26

GUI defined, 2-12

................................................................................................

H how to comment, xxix

how to order, xxix

................................................................................................

I import and export

CM XMl interface defined, 2-43

inhibit MOI changes, 2-32

instance browsers defined, 2-24

................................................................................................

K kernel package, 2-10

key masks, 2-40

................................................................................................

L license manager, 2-6

licenses, 2-5

requirements, 2-6

................................................................................................

M managed object instances, 2-11

managed object types, 2-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

IN-1

modification events defined, 2-12

MOIs defined, 2-24

multiuser collaboration defined, 2-45

................................................................................................

N navigators defined, 2-14, 2-42

network configuration data, 2-10

network states defined, 2-19

new in this release, xxv

................................................................................................

O object editor defined, 2-26

operations defined, 2-14

................................................................................................

P parameter search

defined, 2-59

interface, 2-59

suggestions, 2-60

phone numbers

for document support, xxviii

plug-ins defined, 2-14

prerequisite knowledge, xxvi

................................................................................................

R reason for revision, xxv

replaying workorders, 2-12

resources, 2-49

................................................................................................

S software architecture defined, 2-7

specific network checks, 2-38

synchronization operations, 2-53

................................................................................................

T tabular editor

bulk provisioning, 2-56

tabular editor defined, 2-28

technical support, xxix

template defined, 2-13

template identity defined, 2-34

template masks, 2-40

templates defined, 2-33

................................................................................................

U user actions on datasets defined, 2-41

................................................................................................

W WMS and WPS data sharing, 2-54

workorder operations, 2-31

workorders defined, 2-11, 2-31

workspace defined, 2-19

workspace repository defined, 2-49

WPS data sharing, 2-47

WPS external interfaces defined, 2-43

WPS kernel defined, 2-4

WPS main window overview, 2-17

WPS software architecture defined, 2-7

WPS software packages, 2-9

WPS tabs defined, 2-24

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS

9YZ-05134-0004-PCZZA Release BCR 4

Issue 3 March 2014


Recommended